02 130205 V7 13 EVRC2A N6 NT Manual Control

Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.
13
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

USER’S MANUAL
ENTEC ENTEC
ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Copyright © 2002 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation
RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT http://www.entecene.co.kr
Release Note:
[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00

1. Add explanations for new additional function below
- Support ETHERNET Port(Port4) for EVRC2A
- Support IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10

- Dialing Modem Support(add the setup menu)
[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12

- Support IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Communication (add the setup menu)
- Support Overfrequency Protection Element (add the setup menu)
[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00
After the Ver5.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N(Network type)”.

1. Support “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” function(add the setup menu).
This function is used to interface with ETIMS over Ethernet port.
2. Separate “Communication” setting into “Protocol” and “Port” settings.
3. Describe elements consisting of “Protection” section in order of the menu shown in LCD.
4. Add “CLOSE Function at Normal Frequency restored” in Frequency element.
5. Add the description related with “STATUS” menu omitted in the previous version.
6. Add the description related with “MAINTENANCE” menu omitted in the previous version.
7. Add “Fault Trip(option)” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10

1. Add contents of RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider), one of Voltage Divider Inputs.
[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11

1. Add “6.10. Set Group Change”.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY i
[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20

1. Add “Loss of Phase” in “PROTECTION” menu according to an additional function (option),
“Loss of Phase”.
2. Add “Supply Outage Measurement” as an additional function in menu.
- Add “S-Outage” and “S-O Dura” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ EVENT RECORDER” menu.
- Add “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” set-up in “RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED
DATA” menu.
- Add “S-OUTAGE COUNTER” in “MAINTENANCE” menu.
- Add “SUPPLY OUTAGE” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00
After the Ver6.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N6(Network type)”.
[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

1. Change the terms related with battery testing.
[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01

1. Add “Power Quality” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu.
2. Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in some menus.
- Change “S-Outage Counter” to “Power Quality” in “MAINTENANCE” menu.
- Change “Supply Outage” to “Power Quality” in “EVENT RECORDER” menu.
- Change “S-Outage Count” and “S-Outage Event” to “P-Quality Count” and “P-Quality” in
“RELAY SETUP/ CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
3. Add “HARMONICS” in “MAIN MENU/6.METERING” menu.
[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A-N6 firmware V6.12 upgrading.
1. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding measuring function of
voltage/current unbalance.
- Change “METERING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.
- Change “Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy” in “2.3. Metering Accuracy”.
- Add “10.1.9. Unbalance”.
- Change “Table 10-1. Metering Accuracy” in “10.2. Accuracy”.
2. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding detection function of
voltage/current unbalance.
- Change “MONITORING” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.
ii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
- Change “RECORDER” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.

- Add “Power Quality” in “2.5. Monitoring”.
- Change “SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER”, “POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER”,
“COUNTER” in “2.6. Recorder”.
- Change “Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree” in “3.2.1. Main Menu Summary”.
- Add settings for Unbalance in “6.10. Power Quality”.
- Add Unbalance Counter in “11.4. Power Quality”.
- Change “12.2. System Event Recorder”.
- Change “12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder”.
3. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of adding “Daily Max I” and “Daily Energy”
settings.
- Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
4. Section to be rectified in the manual as a result of changed range of reclose interval 1.
- Change “Reclose interval 1” in “2.4. Protection Elements/ Reclose Control”.
- Change “Range of Reclose 1” in “7.1. Reclose(79)”.
[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00

Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_N6 firmware V6.15 upgrading.
1. Change “5.3. Clock”.
2. Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type”.
- Add “Set Type”, “GMT Sign”, “GMT Hour”, “GMT Min” and “Evt Send Type” set-up in
“RELAY SETUP/ TIME SET & DIS TYPE” menu.
3. Change “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
4. Change “9.3. Clock”.
5. Change “10.1.4. Synchro Voltage”.
6. Change “Table 14-1. Warning Events” in “14.1. Warning Events”.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10

1. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.04 upgrading.
- Change “5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol – Option” : Add “Time Req(m)” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu.
- Change “5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232” : Add “Parity Bit”, “Data Bit” and “Stop Bit” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232” menu.
- Change “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” and “Evt Time Type” set-up in
“COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC” menu.
- Change “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option” : Add “Time Syn’ Ref” set-up in “RELAY
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu.

2. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.06 upgrading.
- Change “5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” menu.
- Change “5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol – Option” : Add the setting items in
“COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” menu.
- Change “6.3. Line VL Sensing” : Add “Install Type” set-up in “SYSTEM SETUP / LINE
VL SENSING” menu.
3. Change the description for “SKIP at Fault” and “Fault ‘I’ Evt” setting in “5.2.5.
EVENT&ETC”.
4. Add the Note in “6.4. System Power”.
[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12

1. Changed the manual based on EVRC2A_NT firmware V7.07 upgrading : Delete “Tx Delay”
set-up in “COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 and DNP2” menu.
- Change the description for “Tx Delay” setting in “5.2.2.1. DNP3.0 Protocol – Option”.
2. Change the description for “TX Post Delay” and “TX Pre Delay” in “5.2.3.1. PORT2 –
RS232”.
3. Change the setting examples of “Use of VD(CVD or RVD)” in “6.2. Line VS Sensing / 6.2.3.
Setting Examples”.
[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12

1. Add the Note in “5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option”.
2. Add the Note in “5.2.5. EVENT&ETC”.
3. Change “Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)” in “7.18. Time
Overcurrent Curves”.
[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13

1. Add the Notes in “2.4. Protection Elements”.
2. Add the Note of “SEF Pickup Current Setup” in “7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)”.
3. Add the Note of “SEF” setting in “7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”.
4. Add the Note in “9.4. Control Type”.
iv ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 5
2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 5
2.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 9
2.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 11
2.5. Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 16
2.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 19
2.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 22
3. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23

3.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 24
3.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 33
3.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 37
4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 40

5. RELAY SETUP .............................................................................................................. 41
5.1. Passcode ............................................................................................................................ 41
5.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 42
5.3. Clock ................................................................................................................................. 76
5.4. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 78
5.5. Clear Saved Data ............................................................................................................... 79
5.6. Factory Debug ................................................................................................................... 79
5.7. Gas Sensor Type ................................................................................................................ 80
5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option ................................................................................... 80
6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................... 82

6.1. Current Sensing ................................................................................................................. 82
6.2. Line VS Sensing ................................................................................................................ 84
6.3. Line VL Sensing ................................................................................................................ 86
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY v
6.4. System Power .................................................................................................................... 88

6.5. Panel Sleep Time ............................................................................................................... 91
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option ..................................................................................................... 91
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option ................................................................................................. 93
6.8. Loop Control - Option ....................................................................................................... 96
6.9. Set Group Change - Option ............................................................................................. 115
6.10. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 116
7. PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 120

7.1. Reclose (79)..................................................................................................................... 122
7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) .................................................................. 128
7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) ................................................................ 132
7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) ............................................................................................. 136
7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) .......................................................... 138
7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)..................................................................................... 142
7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) ................................................................................. 144
7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) ........................................................... 146
7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) .............................................................................. 148
7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) ........................................................................ 150
7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) ............................................................ 152
7.12. Cold Load Pickup .......................................................................................................... 154
7.13. Directional Controls (67)............................................................................................... 162
7.14. Undervoltage (27).......................................................................................................... 170
7.15. Overvoltage (59)............................................................................................................ 172
7.16. Frequency(81) ............................................................................................................... 174
7.17. Other Element................................................................................................................ 177
7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves .............................................................................................. 180
7.19. Loss of Phase - Option .................................................................................................. 207
8. MONITORING ........................................................................................................... 208

8.1. Demand ........................................................................................................................... 208
8.2. Synchronism Check (25) ................................................................................................. 211
8.3. Trip Counter .................................................................................................................... 213
8.4. Recloser Wear .................................................................................................................. 215
8.5. Battery Test...................................................................................................................... 217
8.6. Fault Locator ................................................................................................................... 218
8.7. Gas Low Lock – Option .................................................................................................. 220
vi ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
8.8. EXT’ Trip & Lock – Option ............................................................................................ 220

8.9. Live Load Block – Option ............................................................................................... 221
9. STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 222

9.1. OPTO Inputs ................................................................................................................... 222
9.2. Relay Outputs .................................................................................................................. 222
9.3. Clock ............................................................................................................................... 223
9.4. Control Type .................................................................................................................... 224
10. METERING ............................................................................................................... 225

10.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 226
10.2. Accuracy ........................................................................................................................ 235
11. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 237

11.1. Counters......................................................................................................................... 237
11.2. Wear Monitor................................................................................................................. 237
11.3. Output Relay Test .......................................................................................................... 238
11.4. Power Quality - Option ................................................................................................. 239
12. EVENT RECORDER................................................................................................ 241

12.1. Waveform Capture ........................................................................................................ 241
12.2. System Event Recorder ................................................................................................. 245
12.3. Load Profile ................................................................................................................... 247
12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder............................................................................................ 250
12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option............................................................................... 252
12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option ....................................................................... 254
13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 257

13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 257
13.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 258
13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 259
13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 261
13.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 262
13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 263
13.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 264
13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 265
13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type .......................................................................... 266
13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type ......................................................................... 267
13.11. Side Panel .................................................................................................................... 268
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 269

13.13. VD Wiring Diagram .................................................................................................... 270
13.14. VT Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................................... 271
13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 272
13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 273
13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling................................................................ 275
13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 275
13.19. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 276
13.20. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 276
13.21. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 277
13.22. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 278
13.23. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 278
13.24. Battery Protection ........................................................................................................ 278
13.25. Communications .......................................................................................................... 279
13.26. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 281
13.27. Hardware Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 282
13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 283
13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 284
13.30. Main Board .................................................................................................................. 285
13.31. Analog Board............................................................................................................... 286
13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 287
13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 288
13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 289
13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD) ................................................................................... 289
13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 290
13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 292
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil....................................................................................... 292
13.39. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 293
14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 294

14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 294
14.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 296
viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Description
y EVRC2A with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide
protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best
quality of electric service.
y Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option)
which fundamentally installed.
y In order to perform the protection function, line voltage and current signal filtered with
analog filter and digital DFT full-cosin filter is used.
y EVRC2A provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote.
It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters.
y Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy
metering is also performed.
y Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control EVRC2A with key buttons on the user
interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled,
Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Program 1, Program 2, Hot line tag.
y Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of
settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history.
y EVRC2A contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,
McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous
best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by
programming and modifying.
ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY 1
1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION
y Phase Instantaneous Over-current Element
y Phase Time Over-current Elements
y Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Ground Instantaneous Over-current Element
y Ground Time Over-current Elements
y Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Sensitive Earth Fault Elements
y Negative Instantaneous Over-current Element
y Negative Time Over-current Elements
y Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Sequence Directional Control
y Automatic Reclosing(Up To 4 Shots)
y Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control
y Sequence Coordination Control
y Two Under-voltage Elements
y Two Over-voltage Elements
y Under-frequency Element
y Over-frequency Element
y Loop Control - Option
y Loss of Phase - Option
METERING
y Phase, Ground and Sensitive Ground Current and Phasors
y Line and Phase Voltage and Phasors(Source Side and Load Side)
y Current and Voltage Symmetrical Component Phasors
y Frequency Magnitude and Rate
y Synchronizing Voltage, Phasor and Frequency
y Synchronizing Delta㎸, Delta ㎐ and Delta Leg
y Single and Three Phase Power(MW, Mvar, MVA, PF)
y Energy(MWh, Mvarh)
y Maximum Demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, MW, Mvar, MVA)
y Voltage and current harmonics - Option
y Voltage and current unbalance - Option
2 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY
MONITORING
y Fault Locator
y Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2)
y Trip Counter Limit
y Synchronism Check
y Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase)
y Recloser Operation Failure
y Voltage Transformer Failure
y Battery Automatic Load Test
y Breaker Failure with Current Supervision
y Power Quality - Option
y Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure - Option
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.
COMMUNICATIONS
y Front Panel PORT1 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software
y Side panel PORT2 RS232 Serial Port : EVRC2A interface software , DNP 3.0, MODBUS or
IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option
y Side panel PORT3 RS485 or R232* Serial Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-101
Protocol – Option
y Side panel PORT4 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol and
EVRC2A interface software – Option
NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of
EVRC2A-N6,NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use
RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6,NT, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
RECORDER
y Trip and fault counter
y Supply outage counter and time – Option
y Sag/Swell detection counter – Option
y Voltage and current unbalance detection counter - Option
y System event recorder - last 2048 events
y Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events
y Load profile recorder - last 213days
y Fault Waveform - 15 cycles × 32 events
y Fault trip event recorder - last 512 events - Option
y Power Quality event recorder - last 512 events - Option
USER INTERFACE
y Fault indicators
y Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage
y Dual Functional keypads
y 20×4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
y 32 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc
y RS232 port
y Context Help Messages
y Access Security(Passcode)
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS - Option

y 7 Programmable Relays
y 1 Programmable Alarm Relay
AUXILIARY INPUTS - Option

y 8 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1. Inputs and Outputs
Systems
y 3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38㎸ maximum, 800 Amp maximum
Frequency
y 50 / 60㎐ system and ABC/ACB phase rotation
Control Voltage Input

y AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%)
y Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc
y Based on user requirement, prepare 110V/220V Selectable Switch - Option
User available DC power Output - Option

y DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc
y DC Power Continuous : 40W
y DC Power for 60Sec : 60W
Voltage Divider Inputs (VD) - Standard

Capacitor Voltage Divider Inputs (CVD) – Only EVR
y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V
y Burden : 2e-6 VA
y System Voltage : 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸
y Capacitor value
- Phase Capacitor value : 20㎊
Resistance Voltage Divider Inputs (RVD) – Only EPR
y Maximum Input Voltage : 5V
y Burden : Bow 0.0015 VA
y System Voltage : 15㎸, 27㎸
y Resistance value
- Phase Resistance value : 100MΩ
Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

y Voltage Inputs
EVRC2A-N : 4 Channel(VA, VB, VC and VL)
EVRC2A-N6,NT : 6 Channel
- Source Voltage 1 VA,VB,VC
- Source Voltage 2 VR,VS,VT
y Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V
y Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)
Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

y Current Inputs IA,IB,IC and IG, SEF
y IA,IB,IC,IG Input Current Range
1A Nominal
2A continuous
25A 1 second
Burden : 0.38VA(1A)
y SEF Input Current Range
0.05A Nominal
0.16A Continuous
0.6A 1 second
Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)
Control Inputs - Option

y Control Inputs 8 Channel
y Nominal Voltages and Operating Range
250Vdc(-15%,+20%)
125Vdc(-15%,+20%)
48Vdc(-15%,+20%)
24Vdc(-15%,+20%)
12Vdc(-10%,+30%)
y Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages
Control Output Contacts - Option

y Control Outputs 8 Channel
Normal Open 5 Channel
Normal Close 2 Channel
ALARM 1 Channel
y 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection
y Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20℃(+68℉)
y Maximum operating power
125Vdc 0.1A
(L/R=7ms) 48Vdc 0.8A
24Vdc 3A
250Vac 3A
(cosΦ=0.4)
125Vac 5A
2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Dielectric Strength
y CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs
2㎸(60㎐) for 1 minute
Impulse Voltage
y IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic
Interference Transceivers, 6㎸(1.2×50㎲), 3㎄(8×20㎲)
Surge Withstand Capability

y IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems
(3㎸ oscillatory 1㎒ to 1.5㎒, 5㎸ fast transient 1.2×50㎲)
y IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m
(150㎒ and 450㎒, 5 W transmitter 10㎝)
Vibration Test
y IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on
measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 2.
Control Operating Temperature

y Operating range : -25℃∼+70℃(-13℉∼+158℉)
y LCD : -20℃∼+70℃(-4℉∼+158℉) - standard
y VFD : -40℃∼+85℃(-40℉∼+185℉) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
2.3. Metering Accuracy

The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
components only except the measurement of harmonics.
Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy(1/2)

Measurements Parameters Unit Accuracy Range
Phase A RMS Current
Phase B RMS Current
CURRENT Phase C RMS Current A ±1% of 2×CT 20×CT

Phase G RMS Current
Phase SEF RMS Current
A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage
B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage
C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage

VOLTAGE ㎸ ±1% –
R–N (R–S) RMS Voltage
S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage*
T–N (T–R) RMS Voltage*
SYMMETRICAL I1, I2, 3I0 A ±1% of 2×CT

–
COMPONENTS V1, V2, 3V0 ㎸ ±1%
Phase A, B, C
POWER FACTOR Rate ±0.02 –1.000 to 1.000
3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
3ΦREAL POWER MW ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
3Φ Phase
3ΦREACTIVE Phase A, B, C
MVar ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
POWER 3Φ Phase
3ΦAPPARENT Phase A, B, C
MVA ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
POWER 3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
WATT-HOURS MWH ±2% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
VAR-HOURS MVarH ±2% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase
Phase A/B/C/RG Current A ±2%
DEMAND A/B/C, 3Φ Real Power MW ±2% –
A/B/C, 3Φ Reactive Power MVar ±2%

A-N (A-B) Source Voltage

FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.02 40.00~70.00
R-N (R-S) Load Voltage
1st~7th Harmonic of Current ±1% 0% to 100%

st th
1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage ±1% 0% to 100%
HARMONICS –
THD of Current ±3% 0% to 100%
THD of Voltage ±3% 0% to 100%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side ±2% 0% to 999%
UNBALANCE Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side % ±2% 0% to 999%
Current unbalance(I2/I1) ±2% 0% to 999%
If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.
2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection
Pickup Level.............................................................. OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup
Curve Type
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse, Definite Time (1s ,10s)
IEC : Standard, Very, Extremely, Long, Short Inverse
ESB : Normally, Very, Long Very Inverse
User programmable curves : U1, U2, U3, U4
McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 37
Time dial ................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01
Time adder................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Minimum Response time .......................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear
Low Set Definite Time .............................................. 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s
(supported from Ver 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,NT)
Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s
Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0㎳ time delay (50㎳ max)
5% of trip time or ± 20㎳
Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Active Trip ................................................................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Pickup Level*NOTE .....................................................OFF, 4 to 160 in steps of 1A(prior to Ver 6.15)
OFF, 1 to 160 in steps of 1A(from Ver 6.15)
Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%
NOTE
As per the user’s request, for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the “Pickup
Level” setting range of the protection element is “OFF, 0.1 to 16.0 in steps of 0.1A”. To check
whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed, check “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE” menu.
Reclose Control
Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - ground trip .......................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - SEF trip .............................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ trip ............... 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - phase trip......................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ...................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq’ trip ........... 0 to 5 in steps of 1
Reclose interval 1 ...................................................... 0.50 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01(prior to Ver 6.11)
0.10 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01(from Ver 6.11)
Reclose interval 2 ...................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle............................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5%
Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Cold Load Pickup Trigger ......................................... 52A(Close) or Load Current
Phase Pickup Level ................................................... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
Ground Pickup Level ................................................ 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
SEF Pickup Level*NOTE .............................................. 4 to 2000 in steps of 1A
Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ...................................... 10 to 20000 in steps of 1A
Reset Level ................................................................ 95 to 98% of Nominal Pickup
Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Restore Minimum Time ............................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Reset Time ................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s
Cold Load Pickup Multiplier..................................... OFF, 1.0 to 5.0 in steps of 0.1
Cold Load Pickup Time Duration ............................. 1 to 720 in steps of 1min
Pickup Level Accuracy............................................. 5%
NOTE
As per the user’s request, for the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the “SEF
Pickup Level” setting range of the protection element is “0.4 to 200.0 in steps of 0.1A”. To
check whether the product is dispatched with ZCT installed, check “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE” menu.
Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Minimum Polarizing Voltage .................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle
Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage Vo
For voltage element polarizing the source
VTs must be connected in Wye
Maximum Torque Angle ........................................... 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage V2
Maximum Torque Angle............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1°
Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2°
Undervoltage 1/2 Protection

Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Overvoltage 1/2 Protection

Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
Under/Over frequency
Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Phase A
Minimum Current ...................................................... 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A in Phase A
Under frequency Pickup Level .................................. 40.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
Over frequency Pickup Level .................................... 50.00 to 70.00 in steps of 0.01㎐
Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup ±0.02㎐
at VD Pickup ±0.05㎐
Under/Over frequency Time Delay ........................... 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s(definite time)
Normal frequency CLOSE function .......................... OFF/ON
Normal frequency CLOSE time delay ...................... 0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1sec
Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02㎐, at VD ± 0.05㎐
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 2cycle
Loss of Phase - Option

Pickup Level.............................................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Time Accuracy .......................................................... ± 20㎳
2.5. Monitoring
Demand
Measured Values........................................................ Phase A/B/C/G Current(A)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Real Power(MW)
Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Reactive Power(Mvar)
Measurement Type .................................................... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand
Time Constant ........................................................... 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min.
Phase Pickup Level ................................................... OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Ground Pickup Level................................................. OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Negative Seq’ Pickup Level ...................................... OFF, 10 to 1600 in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%
Synchronism Check
Dead Voltage Maximum ............................................ 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Live Voltage Maximum ............................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Maximum Angle Difference ...................................... 0 to 100° in steps of 1°
Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.00 to 5.00㎐ in steps of 0.01
Synchro-check Phase................................................. R(AB), S(CB), T of Load side
Trip Counters
Number of Pickup Limit............................................ 1 to 20000 in steps of 1
Trip Counter Set ........................................................ 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Recloser Wear
Pickup Wear............................................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1
Rate System ............................................................... 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸
Rate Interrupt(㎸) ...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0㎸ in steps of 0.1
Number of Maximum Interruption ............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1
Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase B Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Set Phase C Wear....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1
Battery Test
Period for automatically check a battery ................... OFF, 1 to 7 in steps of 1day
Fault Locator
Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km
Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms
Power Quality - Option

Detect Function of Supply Outage. ........................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Supply Outage Duration ............................................ 1 to 3600 in steps of 1s
Detect Function of Voltage Sag. ................................ DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Sag. ..................................... 0.30 to 0.95 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Detect Time of Voltage Sag. ...................................... 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle
Detect Function of Voltage Swell. ............................. DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Swell. .................................. 1.05 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT
Detect Time of Voltage Swell. ................................... 1 to 60 in steps of 1cycle
Detect Function of Voltage Unbalance. ..................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Voltage Unbalance ........................... 1 to 100 in steps of 1%
Detect Time of Voltage Unbalance ............................ 0.1 to 60.0 in steps of 0.1s
Detect Function of Current Unbalance...................... DISABLE, ENABLE
Detect Level of Current Unbalance ........................... 1 to 100 in steps of 1%
Detect Time of Current Unbalance............................ 0.1 to 60.0 in steps of 0.1s
Limit Current to Detect Current Unbalance .............. 1 to 630 in steps of 1A
Level Accuracy.......................................................... ± 5%
NOTE : The setting for voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of
EVRC2A-N6,NT.
Gas Low Lock - Option

Pickup Low Level ..................................................... 0.1bar
External Trip & Lock - Option

Use Input Port ........................................................... Opto Input 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or 8
Reset Method ............................................................ LOCAL, LOCAL&REMOTE
Live Load Blocking - Option

Blocking Pickup Voltage ........................................... 0.10 to 0.90 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Load side
Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20㎳
2.6. Recorder
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
y Trigger Source
Protection pickup Elements
Trip command active
y Data Channels
5 currents, 4 voltages, 85 logic input states, 8ch output relays, 8ch Input
y Sample Rate : 16 per cycle
y Trigger Position : 1 to 15cycle
y Storage capacity : 32 events with 15cycle
SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER

y Trigger Source
Protection Elements
52A Contact
Sequence status
Front panel control
AC supply
External control
Fail operation
External input status
System alarm
V1(Source), V2(Load)
Power Quality detect, etc.
y Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle
y Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
y Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events
DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER

y Trigger Source
System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V)
A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2)
Sleep Mode
Power Down Mode(Charge Volt High Alarm)
Setting Change
Gas Status
Alarm Status, etc.
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status.

y Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout
LOAD PROFILE
y Trigger Source
Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
Demand Power Factor(3ф)
Demand Energy( 3ф)
Trigger Time : 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute
y Storage Capacity : Total 5120 Events, 213days/60min.
FAULT TRIP EVENT RECORDER - Option

y Trigger Source
Trigger elements : A,B,C,G, SEF phase and Negative Sequence
Current[A] each phase when fault occurs
y Trigger type : fault occurrence
POWER QUALITY EVENT RECORDER - Option

y Trigger Source
Trigger elements : Source, Load
y Trigger type : supply outage occurrence, sag occurrence, swell occurrence, voltage unbalance
occurrence, current unbalance occurrence
NOTE : The detection of voltage/current unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
COUNTER
y Trip Counter : 0 to 65,534
y Fault Counter : 0 to 65,534
y System Restart Counter : 0 to 65,534
y Supply Outage Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
y Supply Outage Time : 0 to 9,999 hours - Option
y Sag Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
y Swell Counter : 0 to 60,000 – Option
y Voltage Unbalance(Source Side) Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
y Voltage Unbalance(Load Side) Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
y Current Unbalance Counter : 0 to 60,000 - Option
RECLOSER WEAR
y Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
y Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
y Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%
2.7. Communications
Table 2-2. Communications
RS232, 57600bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit
Front Panel Port1
EVRC2A Interface software
RS232, 1200-19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit
Side panel Port2 - Option DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
and EVRC2A Interface software
RS485 or RS232*, 1200-19200bps, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1
Stop bit
Side panel Port3 – Option
DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T
Side panel Port4 – Option DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC60870-5-104 Protocol,
NOTE : The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of
EVRC2A-N6,NT can be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use
RS485 port for EVRC2A-N6,NT, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
3. USER INTERFACE PANEL

This section describes the User Interface Panel (front-panel)
The User interface Panel control is used for;
y Directly control the recloser
y Verify control status
y View system status
y View metering value
y View information stored in the EVRC2A unit
y View and change the EVRC2A settings
Figure 3-1. User Interface Panel
3.1. Construction
Panel consists of 8 sections as below;
y Operation section
y Local control section
y Fault indication section
y Voltage elements section
y Sequence status section
y System diagnostic section
y Battery test section
y Menu control section
3.1.1. Operation Section
OPEN
Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.
CLOSE
Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser.
Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close
Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before
closing the recloser.
POSITION LED
Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.
Figure 3-2. Operation Section
3.1.2. Local Control Section
All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the
control function is enabled and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is
DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable.
PROTECTION ENABLED
All Protection elements are enabled
GROUND ENABLED
Ground Protection elements are enabled
SEF ENABLED
SEF Protection elements are disabled
RECLOSE ENABLED
Reclose function is enabled
CONTROL LOCKED
Front panel function is unlocked
REMOTE ENABLED
Remote control is enabled
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Alternate setting is disabled Figure 3-3. Local Control Section
Primary Setting is enabled
PROGRAM 1
Program 1 function is disabled
PROGRAM 2
Program 2 function is disabled
HOT LINE TAG
Hot Line Tag function is disabled
Protection Enabled
When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The protection enabled condition can be
disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel. The front panel LED
will illuminate on each source of all protection enabling.
NOTE : Although all protection elements are enabled, ground protection elements and SEF
element are operated individually.
Ground Enabled
When Ground Enable LED is ON, the ground over-current elements are enabled. The enabled
Ground can be disabled by pressing the Ground Enabled push-button on the front panel.
SEF Enabled
When SEF Enable LED is on, the Sensitive Earth Fault(SEF) element is enabled. The enabled
SEF can be disabled by pressing the SEF Enabled push-button on the front panel.
Reclose Enabled
When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose
element can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel.
Control Locked
When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local
control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button
on the front panel.
NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load
Test and menu control section can be normally operated.
Remote Enabled
When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are
enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel.
SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0.
Alternate Enabled
When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated.
When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated.
Program 1
A function installed in Program1 is operated when Program1 LED is On.
Depending on user’s request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program1.
Program 2
A function installed in Program2 is operated when Program2 LED is On.
Depending on user’s request, Manufacturer sets a function in Program2.
Hot Line Tag

When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.
3.1.3. Fault Indication Section
Indicates current on the phase or neutral lines is above the minimum pickup setting as programmed
in any of the EVRC2A over-current elements.
y Phase Instantaneous over-current Elements

y Phase Time over-current Elements
y Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Ground Instantaneous over-current Elements
y Ground Time over-current Elements
y Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Sensitive Ground Time Over-current Elements
y Negative Instantaneous over-current Elements
y Negative Time over-current Elements
y Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element
y Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground, and Negative Sequence Directional Control
Figure 3-4. Fault Indication Section
TRIP TYPE
y INST : Shows high current trip (50-1)
y DELAY : Shows delay trip(51)
y HIGH CURR’ : Shows high current lockout(50-2)
FAULT INDICATION
y A, B, C : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines
y G : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line
y SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line
y FI RESET : Reset fault indication/Lamp test
3.1.4. Voltage Elements Section
Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated.

y Two Under voltage Elements
y Two Over voltage Elements
y Synchronism Element
y Under/Over frequency Element
27 : Under voltage pickup

59 : Over voltage pickup
25 : Synchronism check pickup
81 : Under/Over frequency pickup
Figure 3-5. Voltage Elements Section
3.1.5. Sequence Status Section
Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.
RESET : Sequence shows resetting

CYCLE : Sequence shows running
LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout
Figure 3-6. Sequence Status Section
3.1.6. System Diagnostic Section
Indicates Diagnostic status of the EVRC2A. Control run indicates (green) the EVRC2A has
successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. Self Check (Red) indicates the EVRC2A has failed
in its internal diagnostic test.
CONTROL RUN
Status of EVRC2A systems shows normal
SELF CHECK
Status of EVRC2A systems shows warning
Figure 3-7. System Diagnostic Section
NOTE : Control Run LED is blinking when system functional status is normal.
3.1.7. Battery Test Section
Indicates the system power status of the EVRC2A. AC supply indicates the EVRC2A has external
power source. Charge indicates the EVRC2A is charging Battery. Discharge indicates the EVRC2A
has failed in battery load testing.
AC SUPPLY
Status of supplying the external AC
power.
CHARGE
Figure 3-8. Battery Test Section
Status of charging the battery.
DISCHARGE
Status of discharged battery.
BATTERY LOAD TEST [BATTERY TEST MODE]

LOAD(V) : 25.00
Push-button for battery load test. CHARGE(V): 26.50
STATUS : B-OK C-OK
LCD displays during Battery Load Testing.

Figure 3-9. Battery Test Mode
LOAD(V) : On Test, Battery is disconnected from the
charge circuit and connect the battery with load resistor and check the battery. Load
resistor shall be connected with AC supply.
CHARGE[V] : Display the voltage of charge circuit.
STATUS : Display Battery status and charge circuit status.
- B-OK : When the battery voltage is between 21V ~ 28V
- B-HI : When the battery voltage is over 28V
- B-DF : When the battery voltage is between 15V ~ 21V
- B-LO : When the battery voltage is below 15V
- C-OK : When the charge circuit is between 25V ~29V
- C-HI : When the charge circuit is over 29V
- C-LO : When the charge circuit is below 25V
NOTE : All information above is provided by remote mode.
3.1.8. Menu Control Section

The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of the EVRC2A displays four lines of twenty characters each.
LCD DISPLAY
4x20 Characters display
CONTROL KEYS
[▲] [▼] [◀] [▶]
Arrow keys are used for moving through the menu window and the changing of the setting value
[▲] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▼] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode
[◀] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode
[▶] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode
[FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode
[ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level
[ENT] : To select sub menu or data input
Figure 3-10. Menu Control Section
[FUN] Key
Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key
is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message
display.
[ESC] Key
The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.
[ENT] Key
ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to
accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.
[◀] [▶] Key

Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor in the data input mode and change display
message.
[▲] [▼] Key

Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase
value in the data input mode.
PORT1
PORT1 is the port to communicate whit an Interface Software. Communication frame between
EVRC2A and a master can be monitored and saved by using “DNP Frame Monitor” menu of the
Interface Software.
3.2. LCD Display

y 20 x 4 Character Display(LCD or VFD : Vacuum Fluorescent Display)
y All menus are arranged in rotation algorithm.
y When cursor is in top menu, if you press [▲] key, you go to the bottom menu due to Rotation
Menu Algorithm.
y Displays Context Help Message.
3.2.1. Main Menu Summary

EVRC2A has 6 Setting Menu BANKs which can be changed individually.
BANK in Primary Setting Menu is applied to System, BANK in Alternate Setting/EditBank
Setting Menu is not applied to System. Press [Alternate Enabled] button and make the lamp on,
Alternate setting Menu is applied to the system. EditBank Setting is used for setting value.
EVRC2A Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.
Figure 3-11. Main Menu Tree
3.2.2. Select Setbank

Consists of Primary, Alternate, Edit.
y Primary : Select BANK to be applied to System.
y Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a BANK to apply in the system.
y Edit : Select a BANK to edit.
3.2.3. Primary Setting

RELAY SETUP
Consists of PASSCODE, COMMUNICATION, CLOCK, EVENT RECORDER, CLEAR
SAVED DATA, FACTORY DEBUG, GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME SET&DIS TYPE.
SYSTEM SETUP
Consists of CURRENT SENSING, LINE (VS, VL) SENSING, SYSTEM POWER, PANEL
SLEEP TIME, OPTO INPUT SET, OUTPUT RELAY SET, LOOP CONTROL(option) and SET
GROUP CHANGE(option).
PROTECTION
Set items related to protection elements.
MONITORING
Set items related to measurement and maintenance.
SAVE SETTINGS
Save all changed values.
3.2.4. Alternate Setting

The same as “PRIMARY SETTING”
3.2.5. Editbank Setting

The same as “PRIMARY SETTING”
3.2.6. Status
OPTO INPUTS : Shows status of External port.
RELAY OUTPUTS : Shows status of Output port.
CLOCK : Shows the present time.
CONTROL TYPE : Shows specs of Hardware.
3.2.7. Metering
It shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 10. METERING)
3.2.8. Maintenance
COUNTERS : Shows counters related with SYSTEM.
WEAR MONITOR : Shows any damage Interrupter.
RELAY OUTPUT TEST : Tests External Output port.
POWER QUALITY : Shows counters and time related with supply outage and counters related
with swell, sag and unbalance – Option. For more details, refer to (see 11. MAINTENANCE)
3.2.9. Event Recorder

It shows about Event recorder items. For more details, refer to (see 12. EVENT RECORDER).
[LINE CURRENT(A)]
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0
SG: 0 I2: 0
[ZERO SEQ CURRENT]

0 A 0.0 Lag
[RELAY SETUP] [COMMUNICATION]

>1.PASSCODE >1.PROTOCOL SETUP
[SETTING] 2.COMMUNICATION 2.PORT SETUP
>1.RELAY SETUP 3.CLOCK 3.DIALUP MODEM-1
PRIMARY 4.EVENT RECORDER
[POS SEQ CURRENT] 2.SYSTEM SETUP 4.DIALUP MODEM-2
ALTERNATE 5.CLEAR SAVED DATA
0 A 0.0 Lag 3.PROTECTION 5.EVENT&ETC
EDITBANK 4.MONITORRING 6.FACTORY DEBUG
[NEG SEQ CURRENT]
0 A 0.0 Lag 5.SAVE SETTING 7.GAS SENSOR TYPE
8.TIME SET&DIS TYPE
[CLEAR SAVED DATA]
>1.Fault Cycle
[SYSTEM SETUP]
[SENSTV CURRENT] 2.System Status
>1.CURRENT SENSING
0 A 0.0 Lag 3.Load Profile
2.LINE VS SENSING
4.Daignostic
3.LINE VL SENSING
5.Max Demand
4.SYSTEM POWER
6.Energy
5.PANEL SLEEP TIME
7.Counter
6.OPTO INPUT SET
8.Wear Monitor
7.OUTPUT RELAY SET
9.Fault Trip
[PHASE C CURRENT] 8.LOOP CONTROL
10.P-Quality Count
0 A 0.0 Lag 9.SET GROUP CHANGE
[STATUS] 11.P-Quality Event
[GROUND CURRENT] 10.POWER QUALITY
>1.OPTO INPUTS 12.Comm Event
0 A 0.0 Lag
2.RELAY OUTPUTS 13.ALL Saved data
3.CLOCK [PROTECTION]
4.CONTROL TYPE >1.OPERATION [DIRECTION ELEMENT]
2.INTERVALS >1.PHASE DIRECTION
[PHASE A CURRENT] 3.PICKUP CURRENT 2.GROUND DIRECTION
0 A 0.0 Lag 4.PHASE FAST 3.SEF DIRECTION
[PHASE B CURRENT] 5.PHASE DELAY 4.NEQ DIRECTION
0 A 0.0 Lag 6.GROUND FAST
7.GROUND DELAY [VOLTAGE]
[METERING] 8.SEF ELEMENT >1.UNDER VOLTAGE 1
>1.CURRENT 9.NEG SEQ FAST 2.UNDER VOLTAGE 2
2.S-VOLTAGE 10.NEG SEQ DELAY 3.OVER VOLTAGE 1
3.FREQUENCY 11.H/C TRIP-PHA 4.OVER VOLTAGE 2
4.SYNCHRO VOLTAGE 12.H/C TRIP-GND
5.POWER 13.H/C TRIP-NEQ
[USER CURVE SET]
6.ENERGY 14.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA
>1.USER CURVE 1
RECLOSER CONTROL 7.DEMAND 15.H/C LOCKOUT-GND
2.USER CURVE 2
EVERC2A-N6 8.SYSTEM 16.H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ
3.USER CURVE 3
LOOP CONTROL 9.L-VOLTAGE 17.CLOD LOAD PICKUP
4.USER CURVE 4
ENTEC E&E CO. V6.05 10.UNBALANCE 18.DIRECTION
11.HARMONICS 19.VOLTAGE
20.FREQUENCY
21.OTHER ELEMENT
EVRC2A - CURRENT (A) 22.USER CURVE SET
A: 0 B: 0 23.LOSS OF PHASE
C: 0 G: 0
SG: 0 I2: 0
[MAINTENANCE] [MONITORING]
>1.COUNTERS >1.DEMAND
2.WEAR MONITOR 2.SYNCHROCHECK
EVR2A-SYSTEM STATUS 3.OUTPUT RELAY TEST 3.TRIP COUNTER
CONTROL : NOPANEL 4.POWER QUALITY 4.RECLOSER WEAR
BREAKER : OPEN 5.BATTERY TEST
BAT:24.00 GAS:NOGAS 6.FAULT LOCATOR
7.GAS LOW LOCK
8.EXT TRIP&LOCK
9.LIVE LOAD BLOCK
[MAIN MENU]
[EVENT RECORDER]
>1.SELECT SETBANK
>1.FAULT CYCLE
2.PRIMARY SETTING
2.SYSTEM STATUS
3.ALTERNATE SETTING
3.LOAD PROFILE
4.EDITBANK SETTING
4.DIAGNOSTIC
5.STATUS
5.FAULT TRIP
6.METERING
6.POWER QUALITY
7.MAINTENANCE
8.EVENT RECORDER
Figure 3-12. Menu Structure Tree
3.3. Using the LCD Menu

Starting mode Screen appears after powering on Control and initializing System.
INITING LOGO
EVRC2A-SYSTEM STATUS Starting mode Message Display.
CONTROL : NORMAL
BREAKER : CLOSE Control : Control Status displays
BAT:27.49 GAS: NOGAS
Breaker : Breaker Status displays
Battery : Battery Voltage displays
Gas : Gas Status displays
On Starting mode screen, to see Main Menu, press [FUN] key. Use [▲] [▼] key to select sub-
menu. When cursor is in top menu, if you press [▲] key, you go to the bottom menu due to
Rotation Menu Algorithm.
MAIN MENU
[MAIN MENU] Main Menu consists of 8 sub-menus.
>1.SELECT SETBANK
>2.PRIMARY SETTING You can choose any sub-menu by using [▲] [▼] key.
>3.ALTERNATE SETTING
>4.EDITBANK SETTING Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.
>5.STATUS
>6.METERING
>7.MAINTENANCE
>8.EVENT RECORDER
As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.
3.3.1. View Example

To see External input port status. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS”.
The following screen is displayed.
STATUS / OPTO INPUTS
[OPTO INPUTS]
>Input 1: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
>Input 2: CLOSE
>Input 3: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
>Input 4: OPEN
>Input 5: OPEN
>Input 6: OPEN
>Input 7: OPEN Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [▲] [▼] key to see next
>Input 8: CLOSE
>Door st: CLOSE lines.
3.3.2. Setting Example

Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting.
1) Move to “PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”.

A following screen is displayed.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE
[PICKUP CURRENT A] Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S.E.F: OFF
Set the pickup current of Phase Fast/Delay Time Overcurrent Elements.
2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [▲] [▼] key and press [ENT] key to move into
value column.
3) Use [▲] [▼] keys and [◀] [▶] keys to change a new value.
Press [ENT] key and then you can see the changed Phase value.
NOTE: You must save all changed values at Setting Save menu.
3.3.3. Help Function

Help function displays the detail requirements for the setting.
User can check the detail requirements of a setting after selecting the setting item by pressing
[FUN] key.
Help Message
Pick up current - ph Help Message :
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Pickup current - phase (OFF,10~1600A)
S.E.F: OFF
3.3.4. Setting Save

To save all changed values, steps are as follows;
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS” and
follow each step as below.
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / SAVE SETTINGS
①
1) Type Passcode and press [ENT] key
ENTER PASSCODE
0000
2) If Passcode is correct, screen ②(Left) appears; otherwise screen ①
② (Left) appears again.
SETTING VALUE SAVE
<ENT>:SETTING SAVE 3) If screen ② appears, press [ENT] key to save changed value.
③ NOTE :
The changed setting can be effective after it is saved.
SAVE SETTING
If the “save” procedure is canceled, the setting keeps previous
value.
However, by EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with
communication is changed and then saved, the changed setting is
applied after rebooting.
4. SELECT SETBANK
There were only Primary and Alternative banks before version 4.40 and 4 more banks added
since version 4.40.
EVRC2A has 6 setting banks and the user can have 6 different sets depending on Distribution
circumstance.
SELECT SETBANK / PRIMARY

[SELECT SETBANK] Range BANK1 ~ 6
>Primary: BANK1
>Alternate: BANK2 Default BANK1 Step ~
>Edit: BANK3
Set Primary for BANK1.
SELECT SETBANK / ALTERNATE

>Primary: BANK1
>Edit: BANK3
Set Alternate for BANK2.
SELECT SETBANK / EDIT

>Primary: BANK1
>Edit: BANK3
Set Edit for BANK3.
5. RELAY SETUP
Relay set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.
Sets following items for Relay

y Passcode
y Communication
y Clock
y Event Recorder
y Clear Saved Data
y Factory Debug
y Gas Sensor Type
y Time SET&DIS Type
NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no “Gas Sensor Type”.
5.1. Passcode
PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / PASSCODE
① y Press PASSCODE to store changed value.
[PASSCODE CHANGE] y PASSCODE has 4 digits.
ENTER PASSCODE
0000 y Passcode change procedure is as follows;
② ① Enter the old PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.

[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000 ② Enter new PASSCODE, and press [ENT] key.
③ ③ To change and store PASSCODE, enter, [ENT] key.

[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
④ After changing PASSCODE, new PASSCODE will be displayed.
④
[PASSCODE CHANGE]
ENTER NEW PASSCODE
0000
PASSCODE SAVED: 0000
5.2. Communication
5.2.1. Overview
EVRC2A has four ports for communication.
The EVRC2A has the front panel RS232 port, the side panel RS232 port, the side panel RS485
port(or RS232 port) and the side panel Ethernet port.
Communication port settings are available as follows in “Table 5-1. Communication Ports
setting of EVRC2A”.
Table 5-1. Communication Ports setting of EVRC2A

Port Type Speed Parity bit Data bit Stop bit Location
PORT1 RS-232 57600 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Front Panel
PORT2 RS-232 1200 - 19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Side Panel
RS-485
PORT3 1200 - 19200 bps No parity 8 1 User Interface Side Panel
or RS-232
PORT4 RJ45 10BASE-T/100BASE-T User Interface Side Panel
PORT1(RS232)
A port to interface with Interface Software.
PORT2(RS232) – Option
The Port2 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101
protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port2 for the selected protocol by
changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port2.
PORT3(RS485 or RS232) – Option

The Port3 is a port for a serial communication for MODBUS, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101
protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the Port3 for the selected protocol by
changing baud rate and/or other settings for the Port3.
The Port3 type of EVRC2A-N is a fixed RS485 port. However, the Port3 type of EVRC2A can
be selected as RS485 or RS232 by a user. In order to use RS485 port for EVRC2A, the Pin4 and
Pin5 of RS485 should be connected.
PORT4(RJ-45) – Option
The Port4 is a Ethernet port for TCP/IP communication (10 BASE-T /100 BASE-T speed) for
Modbus, IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 Protocol. A user can select the protocol and configure the
Port4 for the selected protocol by changing its settings.
NOTE: From EVRC2A version 5.30, if a setting related with communication is changed and
then saved, the changed setting is applied after rebooting.
During IEC60870-5-104 or DNP3.0 communication through Port2, Port3 or Port 4, a user can
connect with the Interface Software “ETIMS(ENTEC Integration Management Software)” and
use it.
Please refer to “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual”, “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual”
or “IEC60870-5-101/-104 Protocol Technical Manual” for more information about setting for
each protocol.
5.2.2. Protocol Setup

5.2.2.1. DNP 3.0 Protocol - Option
EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the DNP 3.0 through communication
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “DNP3.0 Protocol Technical Manual”
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP /

COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2” to select setting for DNP 3.0
Protocol.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Function
[DNP3.0-1] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Function: ENABLE
Use Port: P2-232 Default DISABLE Step ~
Master Addr’: 60000
Select whether to use DNP3.0 Protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Use Port

[DNP3.0-1] Range P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
>Function: ENABLE
>Use Port: P2-232 DNP1 : P2-232
>Master Addr’: 60000 Default Step ~
DNP2 : P3-232
Select DNP3 communication port.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master Address

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65519
>Master Addr’: 60000
>Slave Addr’: 1 Default 60000 Step 1
>D/L Confirm: SOME
Enter the master station address.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Slave Address

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65519
>Master Addr’: 60000
>Slave Addr’: 1 DNP1 : 1
>D/L Confirm: SOME Default Step 1
DNP2 : 2
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Confirm

[DNP3.0-1] Range NO, YES, SOME
>D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L Retries: 2 Default SOME Step ~
>D/L Timeout: 55
Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.
NO : Data Link Confirm is not used.
YES : Data Link Confirm is used.
SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.
When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If

the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be
failed due to Data Link Reset.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Retries

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 255
>D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L Retries: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>D/L Timeout: 55
Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link
layer.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / D/L Timeout

[DNP3.0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>D/L Confirm: SOME
>D/L Retries: 2 Default 55 Step 1 sec
>D/L Timeout: 55
Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive
Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm
receiving and Data Link retry is available, EVRC2A will send Data
Link Frame again.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Retries

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0~ 255
>D/L Retries: 2
>D/L Timeout: 55 Default 1 Step 1
>A/L Retries: 1
Select the number of retries that will be issued for a given application
link layer.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / A/L Timeout

[DNP3.0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
D/L Timeout: 55
A/L Retries: 1 Default 55 Step 1 sec
>A/L Timeout: 55
Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK)
from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data
transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / SBO Time

[DNP3.0-1] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
A/L Retries: 1
A/L Timeout: 55 Default 15 sec Step 1 sec
>SBO Time: 15
Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no
operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Multi Inter

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
>A/L Timeout: 55
>SBO Time: 15 Default 0.10 Step 0.01 sec
>Multi Inter: 0.10
Enter a time delay between frames when Multi-frame replies.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Tx Delay

[DNP3.0] Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec
>DNP Address: 1
>Multi Inter: 0.10 Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
>Tx Delay : 0.05
Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.
NOTE : The setting does not apply to communication and is not

indicated from Ver 7.07 of EVRC2A_NT.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / PowUp Unsol

>Multi Inter: 0.10
>Tx Delay : 0.05 Default ENABLE Step ~
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
Select the unsolicited mode.
Enable : Unsolicited response is transmitted.
Disable : Unsolicited response is not transmitted.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Time

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 255 sec
>Multi Inter: 0.10
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE Default 5 Step 1 sec
>Unsol Time: 5
Set a delay time of transmission of event data after the last event
occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Unsol Type

[DNP3.0-1] Range NOTRIG, PERIOD
>PowUpUnsol: ENABLE
>Unsol Time: 5 Default NOTRIG Step ~
>Unsol Type: NOTRIG
Set a type to configure a method to send event data.
NOTRIG : If there is no more event occurrence during setting “Unsol
Time” after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.
PERIOD : Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event
data occurring after setting “Unsol Time” starting and elapsing when
the first event occurs.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Class 1

>Class 1: DISABLE
Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE
Select the unsolicited response mode of Class 1 events.

>Class 1: DISABLE
>Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE

Class 1: DISABLE
Class 2: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Class 3: DISABLE
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Master IP Oct 1~4
[DNP3.0-1]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Master IP Oct1: 192
>Master IP Oct2: 168
Default ~ Step 1
>Master IP Oct3:
>Master IP Oct4:
7
2
Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP/UDP Select

[DNP3.0-1] Range TCP, UDP
>TCP/UDP Select: TCP
>TCP Port: 20000 Default TCP Step ~
>UDP Port: 20000
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / TCP Port

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65535
>TCP Port: 20000 Default 20000 Step 1
>UDP Port: 20000
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / UDP Port

[DNP3.0-1] Range 0 ~ 65535
>UDP Port: 20000
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Keep Alive Check Time

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>UDP Port: 20000
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
Default 10 Step 1sec
>Fragment Size: 2048
Set the Time period that checks the communication connecting status
during the idle status.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Fragment Size

Range 64 ~ 2048
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>UDP Port: 20000
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
Default 2048 Step 1
Set the size of DNP3.0 fragment.
COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / DNP1 or DNP2 / Time Req(m)

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min
[DNP3 SLAVE1]
>K-Alv Check Tm: 10
Default 1440 Step 1 min
>Time Req(m): 1440
Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time
received from master station.
NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver 7.04 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through
communication port2 or port3.

COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-
5-101 Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Function
Range DISABLE, ENABLE
[IEC60870-5-101]
>Function: DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>Use Port: P2-232
>Link Addr: 1
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-101 protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Use Port

[IEC60870-5-101] Range P2-232, P3-232, P3-485
>Function: DISABLE
>Use Port P2-232 Default P2-232 Step ~
>Link Addr: 1
Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Link Address

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 65535
>Function: DISABLE
>Use Port: P2-232 Default 1 Step 1
>Link Addr: 1
Enter the slave(EVRC2A) address for IEC60870-5-101 comm-
unication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~65535
>ASDU Addr: 1
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 1 Step 1
>Event Period: 15
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~60000 sec
>ASDU Addr: 1
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Event Period: 15
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0~255 sec
>ASDU Addr: 1
>Cyclic Period: 60 Default 15 Step 1sec
>Event Period: 15
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Retries

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 255
>Retries: 0
Conf.Timeout: 10 Default 0 Step 1
>Max Poll Time: 10
Set the Data retires number.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Retries: 0
>Conf.Timeout: 10 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>Max Poll Time: 10
Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after
transferring the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time
and Data retries is available, EVRC2A transfers the Data again.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>Retries: 0
>Conf.Timeout: 10 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Max Poll Time: 10
Set the Data Polling period time.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>ADSU Addr Size: 2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default 2 Step 1
>ADSU Addr Size: 2
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NEVER, ALWAYS
>ADSU Addr Size: 2
>Link Confirm:ALWAYS Default ALWAYS Step ~
>Link Addr Size: 1
Enter the Link layer confirm mode.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>Link Addr Size: 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 1 Step 1
>Link Addr Size: 1
Enter the size of link address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
>Link Addr Size: 1
>Rx Frame Size: 261 Default 261 Step 1
>Rx Frame TO : 15
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 255 sec
>Rx Frame Size: 261
>Rx Frame TO : 15 Default 15 Step 1 sec
>Tx Frame Size: 261
Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after
receiving the frame sync.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0 ~ 261
>Tx Frame Size: 261
>COT Size : 1 Default 261 Step 1
>IOA Size : 2
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~2
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 1 Step 1
>One Ch Response: NO
Enter the size of cause of transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 1~3
>COT Size : 1
>IOA Size : 2 Default 2 Step 1
Enter the size of information object address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range NO, YES
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default NO Step ~
>Select Timeout: 5
This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length
NACK when no response data available.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~255sec
>Frame Repet’ TO: 30 Default 30 Step 1 sec
>Select Timeout: 5
Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application
layer timeout).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~255
>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1
>CSE Termination:YES
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

>CMD Termination:YES
>CSE Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 7.06 of EVRC2A_NT.
5.2.2.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through
communication port4.

COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-
5-104 Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Function
[IEC60870-5-104]
>ASDU Addr: 1
>Cyclic Period: 60
Select whether to use IEC60870-5-104 protocol or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~65535
>Function: DISABLE
>ASDU Addr: 1 Default 1 Step 1
>Cyclic Period: 60
Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~60000 sec
>Function: DISABLE
>ASDU Addr: 1 Default 60 Step 1 sec
>Cyclic Period: 60
Select the Cyclic Period.
It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t0): 120
>Time Out(t1): 15 Default 120 Step 1sec
>Time Out(t2): 10
Select the Timeout for connection establishment.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t0): 120
>Time Out(t2): 10
Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t0): 120
>Time Out(t2): 10
Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message
( t2<t1).

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 1~255 sec
>Time Out(t1): 15
>Time Out(t3): 20
Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ Event Period

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0~255 sec
>Time Out(t2): 10
>Time Out(t3): 20 Default 5 Step 1
>Event Period: 5
Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several
events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay
time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104/ TCP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535
[IEC60870-5-104]
>Time Out(t3): 20 Default 2404 Step 1
>Event Period: 5
>TCP Port: 2404 Set the TCP/IP Port of EVRC2A for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol
communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
>Select Timeout: 5
Enter the maximum size of received frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size*

[IEC60870-5-104] Range 0 ~ 255
>Rx Frame Size: 255
>Tx Frame Size: 255 Default 255 Step 1
>Select Timeout: 5
Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout*

[IEC60870-5-101] Range 0(OFF), 1~255
>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default 5 Step 1
Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

>Select Timeout: 5
>CMD Termination:YES Default YES Step ~
Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of
commands other than set point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set
point commands.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events
5.2.2.4. MODBUS Protocol - Option

EVRC2A can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication
port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “MODBUS Protocol Technical Manual”

COMMUNICATION / PROTOCOL SETUP / MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS
Protocol.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function
[MODBUS]
Use Port: P3-485
>Slave Addr: 1
Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Use Port

[MODBUS] Range P2-232, P3-232, P3-485, P4-TCP
>Function: DISABLE
>Use Port: P3-485 Default P4-TCP Step ~
>Slave Address: 1
Select MODBUS communication port.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address

[MODBUS] Range 1 ~ 254
>Function: DISABLE
>Use Port: P3-485 Default 1 Step 1
>Slave Address: 1
Enter the Modbus address.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Tx Delay

[MODBUS] Range 0.000 ~ 0.500 sec
>Slave Address: 1
>Tx Delay: 0.005 Default 0.005 Step 0.001 sec
Delay time of sending Real data from RTS Signal is on.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select

[MODBUS] Range TCP, UDP
>TCP Port: 502 Default TCP Step ~
>UDP Port: 502
Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port4(Ethernet).
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP Port

>UDP Port: 502
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for TCP communication.
COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ UDP Port

>UDP Port: 502
Set the TCP/IP port number of EVRC2A for UDP communication.
5.2.3. Port Setup

5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232
EVRC2A side panel PORT2 and related elements are set.
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT

SETUP/ PORT2-RS232” to select setting for PORT2.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Line Speed
[PORT1-RS232] Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps
>Line Speed: 19200
>Parity Bit: NONE Default 19200 Step ~
>Data Bit: 8
Select the baud rate for PORT2.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Parity Bit*

[PORT1-RS232] Range NONE, ODD, EVEN
>Parity Bit: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default NONE Step ~
>Stop Bit: 1
Select whether to use Parity Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Data Bit*

[PORT1-RS232] Range 7, 8
>Parity Bit: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 8 Step ~
>Stop Bit: 1
Select the Data Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1-RS232/ Stop Bit*

[PORT1-RS232] Range 1, 2
>Parity Bit: NONE
>Data Bit: 8 Default 1 Step ~
>Stop Bit: 1
Select the Stop Bit.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ Line Type

[PORT1-RS232] Range DIALUP, 2-WIRE, 4-WIRE
>Stop Bit: 1
>Line Type: 4-WIRE Default 4-WIRE Step ~
>CTS Function: ON
Select a modem for communication.
DIALUP : Dial-Up modem1 is used.
2-WIRE : 2-wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is
monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).
4-WIRE : 4-wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and
CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Function

[PORT1-RS232] Range OFF, ON
>Line Speed: 19200
>Line Type: 4-WIRE Default ON Step ~
>CTS Function: ON
Select whether to use CTS signal or not.
OFF : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data.
ON : After confirming CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Function

[PORT1-RS232] Range OFF, ON
>CTS Function: ON
>DCD Function: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>RTS Function: AUTO
Set whether to use DCD signal or not.
OFF : Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data.
ON : After confirming DCD signal is Asserted, transfer a data.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ RTS Function

[PORT1-RS232] Range OFF, ON, AUTO
>CTS Function: ON
>DCD Function: OFF Default AUTO Step ~
>RTS Function: AUTO
Set whether to use RTS signal and the mode or not.
OFF : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always OFF(Deassert).
ON : RTS signal of EVRC2A is always ON(Assert).
AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of
EVRC2A is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of
EVRC2A is off.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ CTS Chk Out

[PORT1-RS232] Range 1 ~ 255 sec
>CTS Chk Out: 5
>DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 5 Step 1 sec
>TX Post Dly: 50
Set a waiting time that waits CTS signal after RTS signal is ON. In case
of radio communication system, when transfer data at the same time
from various Slave, it produces transmission permission delay time due
to the wireless network traffic congestion. By this setting, try the
transmission with high RTS during checkout time.
It is available if ‘CTS Function’ setting is ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ DCD Timeout

[PORT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec
>CTS Chk Out: 5
>DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 5000 Step 1 msec
>TX Post Dly: 50
Set a delay time for checking DCD signal which determines modem
status before sending RTS signal in 2-wire communication type. If
DCD signal is ON, EVRC2A does not transfer the data and treat it as
DCD Fail after the set time. It is available if ‘DCD Function’ setting is
ON.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Post Delay

[PROT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec
>CTS CheckOut: 5
>DCD Timeout: 5000 Default 50 Step 1 msec
>TX Post Dly: 50
Set the delay time of RTS OFF after data transmission.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2-RS232/ TX Pre Delay

[PORT1-RS232] Range 0 ~ 60000 msec
>DCD Timeout: 5000
>TX Post Dly: 50 Default 5 Step 1 msec
>TX Pre Dly: 50
Set the delay time of starting transmission after CTS signal is received.
5.2.3.2. PORT3-RS232/485
SETUP/ POR3-232/485” to select setting for PORT3.
The setting item of this menu is same as “PORT2-RS232”. Refer to “5.2.3.1. PORT2-RS232”.
5.2.3.3. PORT4-TCP/IP

SETUP/ POR4-TCP/IP” to select setting for PORT4.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / IP Addr’1 ~ 4
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
Range 0 ~ 255
>IP Addr’1:
IP Addr’2:
0
0
Default ~ Step 1
IP Addr’3:
>IP Addr’4:
0
0
Select the IP Address for EVRC2A.
IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / Gateway Addr’1 ~ 4
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
Range 0 ~ 255
>Gateway Addr’1:
Gateway Addr’2:
0
0
Default ~ Step 1
Gateway Addr’3:
>Gateway Addr’4:
0
0
Select the Gateway Address.
Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx
① ② ③ ④
Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / SubnetMask

[PORT4-TCP/IP] Range 255.0.0.0 ~ 255.255.255.255
>Gateway Oct3: 0
>Gateway Oct4: 0 Default 255.255.255.000 Step 1
>S/M:255.255.255.000
Select the Subnet Mask Address for EVRC2A.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP /K- Alv’ Function

[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
>K-Alv’ Idle T: 4
>K-Alv’ Interval: 2 Select whether to use the Ethernet communication connecting status
check function or not.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Idle T

Range 1 ~ 255 sec
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default 4 Step 1sec
>K-Alv’ Idle T: 4
>K-Alv’ Interval: 2 If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the
communication connecting maintainance status.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Interval

Range 1 ~ 255 sec
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv’ Func:DISABLE Default 2 Step 1sec
>K-Alv’ Idle T: 4
>K-Alv’ Interval: 2 After checking the communication connecting status, check the status
again if there isn’t any reply during the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT4-TCP/IP / K-Alv’ Retry

Range 1 ~ 255
[PORT4-TCP/IP]
>K-Alv’ Idle T: 4 Default 1 Step 1
>K-Alv’ Interval: 2
>K-Alv’ Retry: 1 Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as
the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail
and close the communication connection.
5.2.4. RTU Communication Setup (DIALUP MODEM) - Option

EVRC2A can support dial-up modem communication, Hayes-compatible, through Port2 and
Port3 when their port types are both RS232.
The configuration of the Port2 for use of dial-up modem can be set on the menu “DIALUP
MODEM-1”. For the configuration of the Port3, it can be set on the menu “DIALUP MODEM-
2”. Refer to “5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup” for more information about the configuration of
Port2 and Port3 for the dial-up modem communication.
5.2.4.1. Configure modem with AT commands

Before using Modem connected with EVRC2A, following setting shall be confirmed.
Configure port speed(must be done)

Set DNP communication speed the same as the speed between EVRC2A and Modem, and set
DNP communication speed slower than the speed between modems.
Configure answer mode(frequently)

The modem will answer an incoming call on the second ring using the command ATS0=2.
Configure Data Carrier Detect(must be done)

Data Carrier Detect should follow the presence or absence of a calling modem.
The AT command is AT&C1.
Configure Data Terminal Ready(must be done)

Data Terminal Ready should control the modem. If DTR is high, the modem is ready to receive
calls. If DTR is low, the modem should not receive any more calls and should hang up any
existing call.
The AT command is AT&D2.
Configure Data Set Ready(must be done)

Data Set Ready should verify the modem. DSR is always ON.
The AT command is AT&S0.
Configure no CONNECT messages(must be done)

A Hayes AT-style modem usually outputs a message when a call is received. For example:
CONNECT 9600
The modem has a "quiet mode" that disables these messages.
The AT command is ATQ1. There will be no OK printed in response to this command.
Configure no echo of commands(must be done)

Echoing commands can confuse the console, so turn off command echoing.
The AT command is ATE0.
Configure silent connection(must be done)

Most modems have a speaker. By default this is connected whilst a modem is connecting and
negotiating a common protocol and speed. This is very useful for a dialing modem, as it prevents
a human being accidentally repeatedly called. The speaker can be annoying on answering
modems.
The AT command is ATM1.
5.2.4.2. Operation functions when to use Dialing Modem

Transmitting a Communication Packet
y Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
y The Communication packet is transmitted
※. Dial when DCD is Deassert
Receiving a Communication Packet

y Checks DCD is asserted(Check Online)
y The Communication packet is received
※. if DCD is Deassert, receiving is not working.
Dialing
y The user should insert an order for Reset.
y Wait 0.5 second
y Make a phone call by using Dialing String and Dialing Number.
y Checks DCD is Asserted
※. Dial connection waiting time is depending on “ Data Link Timeout” set by the user.
Hang up
y DTR Line is deasserted
y Wait 2 second
y DTR Line is asserted
y Wait 2 second
※. EVRC2A will hang up the modem after a delay of 30 seconds with no valid packet received or
transmitted.
5.2.4.3. Short Message Service (SMS) Support - Option

SMS function is provided for communication based on the dialing modem to send messages of
significant events occurrences to the phones or other communication devices whose phone
numbers are assigned to EVRC2A for SMS function by the Interface Software.
Maximum 5 phone numbers are able to be assigned for receiving SMS and maximum 6 events
on a signal message per one phone number can be sent at a time. The total maximum events for
each a phone number are 48 events.
Following information are included in a single message for SMS.
Device Name:
This is the device name sending a short message.
Point index Description:

This point index description to indicate which event occurs is described with maximum 5
characters and it is the same with the point index used for DNP. In order to figure out what this
description means, see the DNP point table.
Point Index Value:

This indicates the current status value of the point where an event occurs.
※ The current SMS function supports to send a message only for Binary Input event.
5.2.4.4. Dialup Modem Setup

Calling String
In order to set “Calling String”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /

RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 /
CALLING STRING”.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING STRING
① Select a proper dial string in accordance with communication
[CALLING STRING] circumstance (Master or Switchboard dial method).
ATDT ATD : Default Dial
ATDT : Tone Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type)
② ATDP : Pulse Dial
[NEW CALLING STRING]
ATDT
At ①, Insert “Calling String” which a user wants.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
③ 1) In order to change each alphabet(A~Z, space), use [▲], [▼] button,

[NEW CALLING STRING] use [◀], [▶] button to move cursor.
ATDT
2) Push the [ENT] button after “Calling String” is changed, then ② is
!!! SAVE OK !!!
shown.
④
[NEW CALLING STRING] If [ENT] button is pushed at ②, then “Calling String” is changed.
ATDT
Change of setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is

not applied yet.
NOTE: The changed setting is effective after it is saved at
“*.SAVE SETTING” menu.
Calling Number
In order to set “Calling Number”, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /

RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 /
CALLING NUMBER” menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / CALLING NUMBER
① Insert [Modem(Master station) phone number] for calling.
[CALLING NUMBER] Total 16 numbers can be inputted. If numbers under 16 are inputted, the
0000000000000000 rest should be inputted with “X”.
② Insert “Calling Number” which a user wants at ①.

[NEW CALLING NUMBER]
0000000000000000
1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number(0~9, X) and use [◀],
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
[▶] button to move a cursor.
③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
[NEW CALLING NUMBER]
0000000000000XXX
“Calling Number” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing
!!! SAVE OK !!!
setting is completed and then ③ is shown.
④
[NEW CALLING NUMBER] If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is
0000000000000XXX
not applied yet.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at

Initial String
In order to set “Initial String”, “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY

SETUP / COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2/ INITIAL
STRING” menu.
COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM / INITIAL STRING
① Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number,
[INITIAL STRING] character, space or special character.
ATQ1E0M1&C1&D2S0=1
<AT+FCLASS=0 > EVRC2A should be reset before making a phone call(connection).
< >
※ Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.
②
[NEW INITIAL STRING] Insert “Initial String” which a user wants on ①.
AT+FCLASS=0
1) Use [▲], [▼] button to change each number, alphabet, space or
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE
special character and use [◀], [▶] button to move a cursor.
③ 2) Press [ENT] button after changing and then ② is shown.
[NEW INITIAL STRING]
AT+FCLASS=0
NOTE : continuous double spaces or the character next to “\” is
!!! SAVE OK !!!
ignored.
④
[NEW INITIAL STRING] “Initial String” is changed if [ENT] button is pushed. Changing setting
AT+FCLASS=0
is completed and then ③ is shown.
!!! SAVE ABORT !!!
If the [ESC] button is pushed at ②, ④ is shown, but changed setting is

not applied yet.
NOTE : The changed setting is effective after it is saved at

Connect Parameter

COMMUNICATION / DIALUP MODEM-1 or DIALUP MODEM-2 / CONNECT PARAM’”.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Cmd Res’ TO
Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 2 Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Command response waiting time.
If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is
considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the
status of modem failure is maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Connect TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 30 Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection waiting time.
If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a
connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is
maintained.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / Idle Time

Range 0 ~ 255 sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Cmd Res’ TO: 2 Default 60sec Step 1 sec
>Connect TO: 30
>Idle Time: 60 Setting the Modem connection close time.
During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Use (Option)

Range DIABLE,ENABLE
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Idle Time: 60 Default DIABLE Step ~
>SMS Use?: DIABLE
>SMS Time: 5
Enable or disable Short Message Service (SMS) function.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Time (Option)

Range 0~255sec
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>Idle Time: 60 Default 5sec Step 1sec
>SMS Use: DIABLE
>SMS Time: 5 SMS Time is a waiting time to wait for response after a short message
of SMS is sent.
COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM / CONNET PARAM’ / SMS Type (Option)

Range SINGLE, MULTI
[CONNECT PARAMETER]
>SMS Use: DIABLE Default MULTI Step ~
>SMS Time: 5
>SMS Type: MULTI Single or Multiple type is supported for SMS message.
Single type is to send one event’s information(max. 25 characters)
including description and the occurring time of event in one SMS
message.
Multiple type is to send maximum 4 events’ information(max. 11
characters respectively) including only description of each event in one
SMS message.
NOTE: The setting items, SMS Use, SMS Time and SMS Type, are shown on the menu of
EVRC2A supporting SMS function.
5.2.5. EVENT&ETC
COMMUNICATION / EVENT&ETC”.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Method
Range OFF,TH,DB,BOTH
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Method: OFF Default OFF Step ~
> SKIP at Fault: YES
> Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES Select the Analog Event Type. This setting value is applied only to the
AI point with vitalized “Event Active” in DNP point map.
OFF : AI Point Event doesn’t occur.
TH : Event occurs when the AI Point data is over or less than
Threshold value.
DB : Event occurs when the AI data change value is over the Deadband
value.
BOTH : TH and DB are both used.
Use EVRC2A interface program to set “Event Active” enable or disable
of AI point and the Threshold value and Deadband value.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / SKIP at Fault

Range NO,YES
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Method: OFF Default YES Step ~
> Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated
during Fault pickup.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / Fault ‘I’ Evt

Range NO,YES
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Method: OFF Default YES Step ~
> Fault ‘I’ Evt: YES
NO : No Fault current event generated.
YES : Fault current event is generated at every fault sequence.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Queue Size

Range 32,64,128,256
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Queue Size: 256 Default 256 Step ~
> BI Evt Mode: ALL
> AI Queue Size: 256
Set the Binary Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / BI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Queue Size: 256 Default ALL Step ~
> BI Evt Mode: ALL
> AI Queue Size: 256 Set the Binary Event Mode.
ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.
LAST : Only last event is buffed for the same point.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Queue Size

Range 32,64,128,256
[EVENT&ETC]
> BI Queue Size: 256 Default 256 Step ~
> BI Evt Mode: ALL
> AI Queue Size: 256
Set the Analog Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~
> CI Queue Size: 256
> CI Evt Mode: ALL Set the Analog Event Mode.
ALL : All status is buffed for the same point.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Queue Size

Range 32,64,128,256
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode: OFF Default 256 Step ~
> CI Evt Mode: ALL
Set the Counter Queue Size.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / CI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI Evt Mode: ALL Default ALL Step ~
> CI Evt Mode: ALL Set the Counter Event Mode.
ALL : All Counter is buffed for the same point.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘V’ Unit

Range 1V, 10V
[EVENT&ETC]
> CI Evt Mode: ALL Default 10V Step ~
> AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V
> AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a
voltage.
1V: 1V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is
13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 13200.
10V: 10V per 1count of transmitted data. If a voltage magnitude is
13.2kV, the corresponding AI point transmits 1320.
NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of

EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a
voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10V per 1count .
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC / AI ‘P’ Unit

Range 1K, 10K
[EVENT&ETC]
> CI Evt Mode: ALL Default 10K Step ~
> AI ‘V’ Unit: 10V
> AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Set the data format of AI(Analog Input) points associated with a
power.
1K: 1K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the
corresponding AI point transmits 660.
10K: 10K per 1count of transmitted data. If active power is 660kW, the
corresponding AI point transmits 66.
NOTE : These settings are supported from version 6.04 of

EVRC2A_N6,NT. The data format of AI points associated with a
voltage on previous version is fixed to support 10K per 1count .
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Max I

Range NO,YES
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Default NO Step ~
> Daily Max I: NO
> Daily Energy: NO Select whether to transfer the AI event about daily max. load current.
NO : Daily Max. Load Current is not recorded as event.
YES : Daily Max. Load Current is recorded as event.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of

EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Daily Energy

Range NO,YES
[EVENT&ETC]
> AI ‘P’ Unit: 10K Default NO Step ~
> Daily Max I: NO
> Daily Energy: NO Select whether to transfer the AI event about energy at midnight.
NO : Daily Energy is not recorded as event.
YES : Daily Energy is recorded as event.

EVRC2A_N6,NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Time Syn’ Ref

Range LOCAL,GMT
[EVENT&ETC]
>Daily Energy: NO Default LOCAL Step ~
>Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Evt Time Type:LOCAL Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time
Synching with the master station.
NOTE :
This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated
with GMT(in “TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu) are set up
incorrectly, the time internal clock in EVRC2A can be changed
incorrectly at time synchronization.

EVRC2A_NT.
COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC/ Evt Time Type

Range LOCAL,GMT
[EVENT&ETC]
>Daily Energy: NO Default LOCAL Step ~
>Tims Syn’ Ref:LOCAL
>Evt Time Type:LOCAL Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication.
NOTE :
The location of “Evt Time Type” setting depends on
EVRC2A_NT version.
y Ver 7.04 and later : Within “RELAY SETUP / COMMUNICTION
/ EVENT&ETC” menu.
y Prior to Ver 7.04 : Within “RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS
TYPE”. The name of this setting is indicated as "Evt Sent
Type".
5.3. Clock
In order to configure current date and time, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK
SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLOCK” menu.
The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.
Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
RELAY SETUP / CLOCK
① Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②, a cursor is marked

[CURRENT TIME] to be able to change current date and time
2009/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SET

1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to
② move to next item.
[SETTING TIME] 2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
2009/11/05 21:02:38
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings
③
[SAVE TIME] If procedure of saving is completed, ④ is shown.
2009/11/06 15;01:50
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
If [ESC] button is pressed at ③, ⑤ is shown and the changed time
④ settings are not saved.
[SAVE TIME]
* SUCCESS *
[SAVE TIME]
* ABORT *
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
RELAY SETUP / CLOCK
① Screen ① indicates the present time.

[CURRENT TIME] ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time.
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
G2009/01/01 00:00:00 ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time.
PRESS <ENT> TO SET
[CURRENT TIME] Press [ENT] button at ① and then as shown at ②, a cursor is marked
L ⓐ
G ⓑ to be able to change current date and time.
PRESS <ENT> TO SET
It sets the present time to GMT Time or Local time according to the
② “TIME SET&DIS’ TYPE” menu’s “Set Type” setting.
[SETTING TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
1) Use [▲][▼] button to change number and press [▶] button to
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
move to next item.
③ 2) After all settings for time are changed, press [ENT] button to save.
[SAVE TIME]
L2009/01/01 09:00:00 Press [ENT] button at ③ to save the changed time settings
PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE
④ If procedure of saving is completed, ④ is shown.
[SAVE TIME]
If [ESC] button is pressed at ③, ⑤ is shown and the changed time
* SUCCESS *
settings are not saved.
⑤
[SAVE TIME]
* ABORT *
5.4. Event Recorder

Event Recording elements are set such as Recording and Sampling timing and so on.
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT
RECORDER” to select setting for the event recording elements.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profile: ON
Select On or Off for Fault Cycle recording.
Recorded Fault Cycle can be viewed in menu, “EVENT
RECORDER”.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Len’ of Pre F

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14 cycle
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1 cycle
>Load Profile: ON
Enter the length of prefault in fault cycle.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile

[EVENT RECORDER] Range ON, OFF
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profile: ON
Select On or Off for Load Profile recording.
Recorded Load Profile can be viewed in menu, “EVENT
RECORDER”.
RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)

[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5,10, 15,20,30,60 min
>Fault Cycle: ON
>Len’ of Pre F: 4 Default 15 Step ~
>L.P save time(m):15
Set Load Profile recording interval.
5.5. Clear Saved Data

In order to reset saved data, go to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING /
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA” menu.
RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA
[CLEAR SAVED DATA] Clear Saved Data
>1.Fault Cycle
>2.System Status Select item for clearing and then press [ENT] button.
>3.Load Profile
>4.Daignostic If procedure of clearing is completed, the message, “EVENT CLEAR
>5.Max Demand
>6.Energy SUCCESS” is shown.
>7.Counter
>8.Wear Monitor
>9.Fault Trip
>10.P-Quality Count y Fault Cycle
>11.P-Quality Event
>12.Comm’ Event y System Status
>13.All Saved Data
y Load Profile
FAULT CYCLE DATA y Diagnostic
PRESS ENT TO CLEAR y Max Demand
y Energy
FAULT CYCLE DATA y Counter
!! DATA CLEARED !! y Wear Monitor
y Fault Trip
y P-Quality Counter
y P-Quality Event
y Communication Buffer
y All Saved Data
NOTE : It is recommended to have Backup data because

Cleared(Deleted) data can not be recovered.
5.6. Factory Debug

This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.
5.7. Gas Sensor Type

Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS
SENSOR TYPE” to select setting for the gas sensor type.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / GAS SENSOR TYPE

[GAS SENSOR TYPE] Range NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2
>Type Select: TYPE2
Default NONE Step ~
NONE : Gas Sensor is not used.
TYPE1 : Set TYPE1 if Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.
TYPE2 : Set TYPE2 if Recloser manufactured from JULY, 2005.
NOTE : According to a recloser type, they may be no this setting on the menu.
5.8. Time Set & Display Type – Option

It is to set Date Display for all related Menu.
Move to “PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EDITBANK SETTING / RELAY SETUP / TIME
SET&DIS TYPE”.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Sign*
[TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range +,-
>Set Type: LOCAL
>GMT Sign: - Default + Step ~
>GMT Hour: 0
Set GMT time and the local time off-set direction. Local time is faster
than GMT time, select ‘+’, otherwise, select ‘-’.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Hour*

[TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range 0~23
>Set Type: LOCAL
>GMT Sign: - Default 0 Step 1
>GMT Hour: 0
Set the hour difference between local time and GMT.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / GMT Min*

[TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range 0~59
>GMT Hour: 0
>GMT Min : 0 Default 0 Step 1
>Disp’ Type: YMD
Set the minute difference between local time and GMT.
NOTE
Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00);
Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0
NOTE
If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened
as follows.
- If the "Time Syn’ Ref" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in EVRC2A can
be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.
- If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event
transmitted is not correct.
NOTE : The above set values marked with * are indicated from Ver 6.15 of EVRCA.
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Disp’ Type

[TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range YMD, MDY
>GMT Min : 0
>Disp’ Type: YMD Default YMD Step ~
>Time Syn’ Ref: GMT
YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date
MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year
RELAY SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE / Time Syn’ Ref

[TIME SET&DIS’TYPE] Range LOCAL, GMT
>GMT Min : 0
>Disp’ Type: YMD Default GMT Step ~
>Time Syn’ Ref: GMT
Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized
with GPS(or IRIG).
6. SYSTEM SETUP
System set shall be set independently for each bank. However, from version 4.41, regardless of
bank, it will be applied to all other banks if it is set in a bank.
Sets following items for System

y CT Ratio
y VT or PT Ratio
y Power Line Frequency, Phase rotation
y Panel sleep time
y Opto-Input setting
y Relay output setting
y Loop Control setting – Option
y Set Group Change setting – Option
y Power Quality – Option
6.1. Current Sensing

6.1.1. Description
This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified
in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT
inputs must be specified as 1 Amp.
As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase
currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for the neutral over-current. In
addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary
conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration,
the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the
sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be
entered.
For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).
6.1.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio
[CURRENT SENSING] Range 1 ~ 1200
>PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Enter the phase CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

PHA CT Ratio: 1000
>GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Enter the ground CT primary current value.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

PHA CT Ratio: 1000
GND CT Ratio: 1000 Default 1000 Step 1
>SEF CT Ratio: 1000
Enter the sensitive earth CT primary current value.
6.2. Line VS Sensing

6.2.1. Description
To measure Source Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform voltage measurements, power
calculations, and directional control of over-current elements.
6.2.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VS SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VS SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default VD-W Step ~
VT Ratio: 155.9
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.
NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS 2nd(v)

[LINE VS SENSING] Range 30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 100.0 Step 0.1 V
VT Ratio: 155.9
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)
This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VT SENSING / VS Ratio

[LINE VS SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 760.0
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 155.9 Step 0.1
>VT Ratio: 155.9
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
6.2.3. Setting Examples
Use of VD(CVD or RVD)

Case of VD(CVD or RVD) installed in Recloser, setup as follows;
Usable in Wye connection. Set VT2nd(v) 100 as Default.

PT Ratio is calculated as below.
VoltageФ-Ф = VoltageФ-N × SQRT(3)
VoltageФ-N = VT 2nd(v) × VT Ratio
Hence,
15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, therefore 8.66㎸Ф-N = 55.5(V) × 155.9
If user line voltage between phases (VoltageФ-Ф) is 11㎸, set VT2nd(v) of 40.7V and set VT Ratio
of 155.9 (11㎸Ф-Ф => 6.35㎸Ф-N, 6.35㎸ = 40.7(V) × 155.9)
27㎸Ф-Ф = 15.59㎸Ф-N, therefore 15.59㎸Ф-N = 100(V) × 155.9
38㎸Ф-Ф = 21.94㎸Ф-N, therefore 21.94㎸Ф-N = 140.7(V) × 155.9
Use of External PT by User

Line is Wye connection type and has VФ-Ф = 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then VT
Ratio is 14400/120. Because of 15㎸Ф-Ф = 8.66㎸Ф-N, VT2nd(v) is 8.66㎸Ф-N / 120 = 71.2V
Line with Delta connection type and has VФ-Ф= 15㎸. If external rated PT is 14400 : 120, then
VT Ratio is 14400/120 and VT2nd(v) is 15㎸Ф-Ф / 120 = 125V
Table 6-1. VT Ratios of External PTs

Voltage Divider Potential Transformer
Line-Line
Wye connection Wye connection Delta connection
Voltage
VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio VT 2nd (v) VT Ratio
120 120
15㎸ 100 86.6 71.2 125
(14400:120) (14400:120)
215 215
27㎸ 100 155.9 72.5 125.6
(25800:120) (25800:120)
300 300
38㎸ 100 219.4 73.1 126.7
(36000:120) (36000:120)
6.3. Line VL Sensing

6.3.1. Description
To measure Load Voltage, set Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage, VT Ratio.
With Line VTs installed, the EVRC2A can be used to perform synchronism elements.
6.3.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Connect Type
[LINE VL SENSING] Range NONE, WYE, DELTA, VD-W, VD-D
>Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default VD-W Step ~
VT Ratio: 155.9
Enter None if line VTs are not to be used.
NONE : VT uninstalled.
If used, external PT by user, enter the VT connection made to the
system as Wye or Delta.
WYE : Install type wye.
DELTA : Install type delta.
If installed VT of Capacitor Voltage Divide type.
VD-W : If the user system made to 3 phase 4 wire.
VD-D : If the user system made to 3 phase 3 wire.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT 2nd(v)

[LINE VL SENSING] Range 30.0 ~ 250.0 V
Connect Type: NONE
>VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 100.0 Step 0.1 V
VT Ratio: 86.6
Enter Secondary Nominal Voltage(V)
This setting is the voltage across the VT secondary winding when
nominal voltage is applied to the primary.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / VT Ratio

[LINE VL SENSING] Range 10.0 ~ 760.0
Connect Type: NONE
VT 2nd(v): 100.0 Default 155.9 Step 0.1
>VT Ratio: 155.9
Enter the VT primary to secondary turns-ratio with this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LINE VL SENSING / Install Type

[LINE VL SENSING] Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T
VT 2nd(v): 100.0
VT Ratio: 155.9 Default 3P Step ~
>Install Type: 3P
Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.
3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed
1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the
recloser body unit.
1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the
recloser body unit.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
y Directional Control
y Loss of Phase
y Synchronism Check
y Voltage Unbalance Detection
y Live Load Blocking
y Loop Control
6.3.3. Setting Example

Refer to (6.2.3. Setting Examples)
6.4. System Power

6.4.1. Description
Menu to set Frequency of Protected Line and installed Phase rotation
6.4.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Frequency
[SYSTEM POWER] Range 50, 60 ㎐
>Frequency: 50
Phase Rotation: ABC Default 50 Step ~
>Install Dir’: NOR
Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a
default to set the optimal digital sampling rate.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Rotation

[SYSTEM POWER] Range ABC, ACB
Frequency: 50
>Phase Rotation: ABC Default ABC Step ~
Select the phase rotation of the power system.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Install Direction

[SYSTEM POWER] Range NOR(NORMAL), REV(REVERSE)
Frequency: 50
>Phase Rotation: ABC Default NOR Step ~
Select the install direction of Recolser.
During operating after setup, change only this setting to convert a load
side to a source side or reversely.
NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions
performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if
this setting is changed.
y Directional Control
y Loss of Phase
y Synchronism Check
y Voltage Unbalance Detection
y Live Load Blocking
y Loop Control
NOTE: The voltage sensing type to the load side can be checked on the setting of "Install
Type" in the "LINE VL SENSING" menu.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SYSTEM POWER / Phase Combination

[SYSTEM POWER] Range abc, cab, bca, acb, bac, cba
>Phase Rotation: ABC
>Install Dir’: NOR Default abc Step ~
>Phase Combi’: abc
Put real phase of power system to a bushing or a terminal of a control
device. As example, if setting value is cab, it means that bushing A is
connected with phase C and bushing B is connected with phase A.
NOTE: The “Phase Combination” setting will be shown from version 6.04 of EVRC2A-
N6,NT. In order to get the details relevant to the connection for EVRC2A-N6,NT
from version 6.04, refer the following figure and table.
Figure 6-1. Phase Connection
Table 6-2. Phase Connection & Display Mapping Table

Line feeding Recommend Setting Phase Mapping Result
Bushing Terminal Phase Install Direction LCD/INDEX Display : Bushing/Controller
Combination Source V(Load V) / Current Terminal
Case 1 : abc abc NORAMAL Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 2 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 3 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 4 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia A(R)/IA
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib C(T)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic B(S)/IB
Case 5 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia B(S)/IB
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib A(R)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic C(T)/IC
Case 6 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia C(T)/IC
ABC Vb(Vs)/Ib B(S)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic A(R)/IA
Case 7 : abc abc REVERSE Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 8 : cab cab Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA
Case 9 : bca bca Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 10 : acb acb Va(Vr)/Ia R(A)/IA
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib T(C)/IC
Vc(Vt)/Ic S(B)/IB
Case 11 : bac bac Va(Vr)/Ia S(B)/IB
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib R(A)/IA
Vc(Vt)/Ic T(C)/IC
Case 12 : cba cba Va(Vr)/Ia T(C)/IC
RST Vb(Vs)/Ib S(B)/IB
Vc(Vt)/Ic R(A)/IA
6.5. Panel Sleep Time

6.5.1. Description
Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.
6.5.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / PANEL SLEEP TIME
[PANEL SLEEP TIME] Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min
>Interval(m): 5
Default 5 Step 1 min
Enter the sleep mode entering time
Setting the interval time of which Panel indicator turns into Sleep
mode.
On “sleep mode”, press [▼] button to be out from the “sleep mode”.
6.6. Opto Input Set - Option

6.6.1. Description
Menu to set External input terminal function and Debounce time
The opto input is available as an ordering option.
Status LCD Display
Debounce
time Triger
EXTERNAL X
INPUT X Function execute
REMOTE mode
Figure 6-2. Input logic
6.6.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Func
[OPTO INPUT SET] Range NONE, TRIP, … , OUT8 RESET
>I1 Func: NONE
I1 Debounce: 0.02 Default NONE Step ~
I2 Func: NONE
Enter the function of External input terminal Opto input can have
following functions.
NONE TRIP CLOSE
PROTECTION GROUND SEF
Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable
RECLOSE CONTROL ALTERNATE SETTINGS
Enable/Disable Locked/Unlocked Enable/Disable
PROGRAM1 PROGRAM2 HOT LINE TAG
Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Enable/Disable
FAULT INDICATION OUTPUT RELAY

BATTERY LOAD TEST
RESET 1∼8 RESET.
For more details, refer to “Appendix A. OPTO INPUT FUNCTION”.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OPTO INPUT SET / I1 Debounce

[OPTO INPUT SET] Range 0.01 ~ 9.99 sec
I1 Func: NONE
>I1 Debounce: 0.02 Default 0.02 Step 0.01 sec
I2 Func: NONE
Enter debounce time to prevent chattering in Input
Input 2 ~ Input 8, the same as Input 1 above
6.7. Output Relay Set - Option

6.7.1. Description
Menu to set External Output Terminal Function and Output type
The output relay is available as an ordering option.
Protective Elements
Relay Setting
( 50.51,27,59...etc )
Function Occurrence
Status LCD Display
S/R LATCH
Pulse T
Type PULSE Y OUTxx Relay
Latch
LATCH S
Q
R
OPTO INPUT SET(OUTxx Reset)

Pulse
OUTPUT RELAY TEST

2s
Figure 6-3. Output logic
6.7.2. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Func
[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range NONE, TRIP, … , NEQ FLT*
>O1 Func: NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default NONE Step ~
O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Enter the function of External output terminal.
Output Relay can have following function.
NONE TRIP CLOSE
FAIL TRIP FAIL CLOSE FAIL AC
FAIL BATTTERY 27 ELEMENT 59 ELEMENT
25 ELEMENT 81 ELEMENT 79 RESET
79CYCLE 79LOCKOUT SELFCHECK
PROTECTION Enable GROUND Enable SEF Enable
RECLOSE Enable CONTROL Locked REMOTE Enable
ALTERNATE SETTINGS
PROGRAM1 Enable PROGRAM2 Enable
Enable
HOT LINE TAG Enable LO/RE OPEN ALARM
CLOSE - 52A INPUT 1~ 8 GAS LOW*
OPEN - 52B* SYSTEM OK* CLOSE BLOCK*
MECHANISM LOCK* GAS LOW LOCK* EXT’ TRIP LOCK*
HIGH CURRENT
INST FAULT* DELAY FAULT*
LOCKOUT FAULT*
PHASE FAULT* GROUND FAULT* SEF FAULT*
NEQ FAULT*
For more detail, refer to “Appendix B. RELAY OUTPUT

FUNCTION”.
NOTE : The function marked with ‘*’ is an option. That function

may not be supported by the option type.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Type

[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range PULSE, LATCH, S/R LATCH
O1 Func: NONE
>O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default S/R LATCH Step ~
O1 Pulse T: 0.05
S/R LATCH: Output signal is delivered only this function activates (ON).
PULSE: Output signal is delivered only during PULSE T. To activate
Output again, turn this function OFF and then, turn it ON again.
LATCH: Output signal is delivered once this function ON. To turn it
off, it needs Reset signal and it is set in “OPTO INPUT SET”
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / OUTPUT RELAY SET / O1 Pulse T

[OUTPUT RELAY SET] Range 0.01 ~ 99.99 sec
O1 Func: NONE
O1 Type: S/R LATCH Default 0.05 Step 0.01 sec
>O1 Pulse T: 0.05
Sets Duration time if OUTPUT TYPE is PULSE
Output 2 ~ 8 is the same as above.
6.8. Loop Control - Option

The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal
operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs.
Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID
point Recloser, TIE point Recloser.
Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).
Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC)
When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B
operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence,
Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint
Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing
Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR
Function is operated and the load side is disconnected.
MIDpoint Recloser(MID)
When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or
Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a
permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to
Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During
TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After
recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically
changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed.
When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects
the load side.
TIEpoint Recloser (TIE)

TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV.
When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and locks out.
TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side
and when both sides become DV.
LCD Initial Screen

Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, are displayed on LCD Initial Screen.
Press “ENT” KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.
LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE]
Display a selected type.
VS: [DV], [LV]
Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line
voltage or Live line voltage.
VL: [DV], [LV]
LOOP CONTROL [TIE] Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line
VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]
VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] voltage or Live line voltage.
AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]
VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead
line voltage of Recloser’s Source side.
VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead
line voltage of Recloser’s Load side.
AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN]
Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.
LOOP CONTROL KEY

Use PROGRAM KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel.
Program 1: Enable/Disables Loop control function.
Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled.
SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be
selected on OPEN status.
Program 2: Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of

SEC, MID.
Figure 6-4. Loop Control Key Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled.
Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation,
Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the
preset values.
6.8.1. Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select
[LOOP CONTROL] Range NONE, SEC, MID, TIE
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default NONE Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Select the Recloser Type and add Loop Control function.
After selecting, press Program 1 Key to enable Loop Control.
NONE : Loop control is not in use.
SEC : SECtionalizing Recloser
MID : MIDpoint Recloser
TIE : TIEpoint Recloser
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default VS Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used
in SEC, MID.
Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID
VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage
VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
Standard Model, EVRC2A uses VD(Voltage divider, CVD or RVD) to

measure the voltage. It measures only A, B, C, R phases, phase S and T
are not measured.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] Range VS, VL, VS&VL
>Type Select: NONE
>VRS - S/M: VS Default VS Step ~
>VRS - Tie: VS
Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE.
TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.
VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage

VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage
VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load side
voltage becomes dead line voltage.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default 3PN Step ~
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage
sensor(VD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
VD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.
3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 3PN, 3PP, 1PN(A), 1PN(B), 1PN(C), 1PP(AB), 1PP(BC), 1PP(CA)
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default 3PN Step ~
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage
sensor(VD or VT) connection type.
Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage.
Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for VD(CVD or RVD) type
Control S,T phase are not measured.
3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral
3PP : 3 Phase-Phase
1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral
1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral
1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral
1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B
1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C
1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt- Mid

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON
>VS Wire: 3PN
>VL Wire: 1PN(A) Default OFF Step ~
>Cng Alt-Mid : OFF
Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Set Value is used in
MID.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time (LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.
OFF : Turn off auto change.

ON : Turn on auto change.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Cng Alt-Tie

[LOOP CONTROL] Range OFF, ON(VS), ON(VL), ON(BOTH)
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default OFF Step ~
>LC After Op:DISABLE
Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE.
Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting,
after set time (LL Regain T).
To use this function, Loop control (setting value) of Primary and
Alternate shall be set as the same.
OFF : Turn off auto change.

ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS.
ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL.
ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC.
To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by
Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is
coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled,
PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not

automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op

[LOOP CONTROL] Range DISABLE, ENABLE
>Cng Alt-Tie: OFF
>LC After Cl:DISABLE Default DISABLE Step ~
Select After Manual Open : Setting Value is used in TIE.
To select Loop control function automatically enable after recloser is
opened by manual operation. Manual open is referred when the
operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control
function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is
turned on.
DISABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is not

automatically activated. (Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)
ENABLE : After Manual open, Loop control function is automatically
activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DL

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE.
After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain
period, TIE opens by Loop control.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / Auto Rest’ T

>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID.
This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enabled.
SEC operates Loop control (Automatic Open) if a voltage selected

from “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage
becomes Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close).
MID, if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line, and
when Loop control (“Chg Alt-Tie” is on, it automatically changes to
Alternate Setting. After Loop control, Live Line becomes Tie Close,
and during operation, it figures as a fault and Trip Lockout. After it
becomes Live line, Restore (auto close and change to Primary setting).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL V Max(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 20.0 ~ 70.0 %
>OT Both DL: 10.00
>Auto Rest’ T: 5.00 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 %
>DL V Max(%): 50.0
Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage.
In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it
determines Dead Line.
In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”.
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL V Min(%)

[LOOP CONTROL] Range 50.0 ~ 85.0 %
>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 70.0 Step 0.1 %
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage.
In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it
determines Live Line.
In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”,
In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DL Pickup T

>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 50.00 Step 0.01 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”, the line
becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that
SEC, MID, TIE can operate.
“DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time
while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation.
Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T”
Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or
recloser’s reclosing time.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / LL Regain T

>LL V Min(%): 70.0
>DL Pickup T: 50.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>LL Regain T: 10.00
Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and
during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line.
SEC’s reset Time shall be longer than MID 5 seconds, and MID’s shall
be longer than TIE’s 5 seconds.
When timer is finished, SEC is opened, MID changes Settings from
Primary to Alternate(if Chg Alt-Mid is enable), and TIE is closed
automatically after changing settings form Primary to Alternate(if Chg
Alt-Tie is enable).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Time

>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T: 5.00 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Dead Bus Reset Time : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time
from “DL Pickup T”. This timer operates when “DL Pickup T” is set
and the line becomes Live line.

PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LC

>LL Regain T: 10.00
>DL Reset T: 5.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>NRT After LC: 10.00
Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in
MID, TIE.
This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a
fault after Loop control.
After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings, while backward
distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set
time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and
MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.
After “LL Regain T”, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set
time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips
after a set time, reclosing is executed.

6.8.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram
Figure 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic

Figure 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic

Figure 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic

6.8.3. Loop Control Application

5-Reclosers Loop Control
For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of
MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source
side to SEC-MID-TIE.
In “Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for
CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-3. 5-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2
Type Select - SEC MID TIE MID SEC -
VRS – S/M - ←⎯⎯

VS
←⎯⎯
VS
X ⎯⎯→
VS
⎯⎯→
VS
-
VRS – Tie - X X VS&VL X X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X ON X ON X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X X ON X X -
LC After Cl - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -
LC After Op - - X ENABLE X - -
OT Both DL - X X 10.00 X X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 -
LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 -
DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
NRT After LC - X 10.00 10.00 10.00 X -
PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -
PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Figure 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
“DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.
SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,
SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.
To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set
than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable,
SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically,
and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region
shall be alive by backward distributing line.
Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto-
Restoration Time.
Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.
MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than MID.
When “LL Regain T” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically.
Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to
Alternate setting.
Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault.
F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward
distributing line.
Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to
Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time.
Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp
lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated
Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T”
operates.
Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3)
operate. When “LL Regain T” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting
automatically.
Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault.
distributing line.
Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3)
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous
normal line.

3-Reclosers Loop Control

For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of
TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE.
In “Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1
side. And the source side bushings of RC3 are installed for CB2 side.
Table 6-4. 3-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2
Type Select - SEC TIE SEC -
VRS – S/M - ←⎯⎯VS

X ⎯⎯→VS
-
VRS – Tie - X VS&VL X -
VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN -
VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -
Cng Alt-Mid - X X X -
Cng Alt-Tie - X ON X -
LC After Cl - ENABLE X ENABLE -
LC After Op - - ENABLE - -
OT Both DL - X 10.00 X -
Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 -
LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 -
DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 -
LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 5.00 -
DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -
NRT After LC - X 10.00 X -
PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -
PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE X ENABLE -
Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)
“X” is not used.

Figure 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time
becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
SEC, TIE has the same setting time.
SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE
shall have longer time set than SEC.
When “LL Regain T” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2)
automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
distributing line.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto
Restoration Time.
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

Figure 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault
Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip
Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated
time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.
TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close.
When closing TIE(RC2), MID(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.
Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1).
Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.

6.9. Set Group Change - Option

Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is
necessary to change Protection setting. EVRC2A has two options includes Primary Setting and
Alternate Setting to help in this situation. And these settings can be selected automatically by
“Set Group Change” function.
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP / SET GROUP CHANGE / Function

[SET GROUP CHANGE] Range DISABLE,ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
>Time interval: 30 Default DISABLE Step ~
Set whether to use Set Group Change.
When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is
forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is
reverse(backward).
PRIMARY SETTING / SYSTEM SETUP/ SET GROUP CHANGE / Time interval

[SET GROUP CHANGE] Range 10~180sec
>Function: DISABLE
>Time interval: 30 Default 30 Step 1sec
If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.
Applying rules
y This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault
detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work.
y This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage
and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current.

6.10. Power Quality - Option

Place the curser on “10. POWER QUALITY” in SYSTEM SETUP menu, press [ENT] button to
move into this menu. Power Quality elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Func (Option)

[POWER QUALITY] Range Disable, Enable
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration: 20 Default Disable Step ~
>SAG Func: Disable
It is to set event recording of supply outage enable or disable.
Outage time, number of times and duration can be viewed in menu,
“MAINTENANCE” and “EVENT RECORDER.”
Refer to “11.4. Power Quality – Option” for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / S-O Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~3600 sec
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration: 20 Default 20 Step 1 sec
>SAG Func: Disable
It is to set event recording detect supply outage and to set time to get
recovered from supply outage.
Refer to “11.4. Power Quality – Option” for more information.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Func (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range Disable, Enable
>S-O Func: Disable
>S-O Duration: 20 Default Disable Step ~
>SAG Func: Disable
It is to set event recording of sag enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.30 ~ 0.95 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
>S-O Duration: 20
>SAG Func: Disable Default 0.80 Step 0.01
>SAG Pickup: 0.80
Set a detect level of Voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality.
Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated
voltage.

SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SAG Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1~60 cycle
>SAG Func: Disable
>SAG Pickup: 0.80 Default 5 Step 1
>SAG Duration: 5
Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Func (Option)

>SAG Pickup: 0.80
>SAG Duration: 5 Default Disable Step ~
>SWL Func: Disable
It is to set event recording of swell enable or disable.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1.05 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
>SWL Func: Disable
>SWL Pickup: 1.20 Default 1.20 Step 0.01
>SWL Duration: 20
Set a detect level of voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality.
Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated
voltage.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / SWL Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1~60 cycle
>SWL Func: Disable
>SWL Pickup: 1.20 Default 5 Step 1
>SWL Duration: 20
Set a detect time for voltage swell(voltage high).
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Func (Option)

>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup: 30 Default Disable Step ~
>UBI Duration: 4.0
It is to set event recording of current unbalance enable or disable.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-

N6,NT.

SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~ 100 %
>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup: 30 Default 30 Step 1%
>UBI Duration: 4.0
Set a detect level of current unbalance for Power Quality.
Current unbalance is calculated by following formula.
I2
UI rate = × 100
I1
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-

N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
>UBI Func: Disable
>UBI Pickup: 30 Default 4.0 Step 0.1 sec
>UBI Duration: 4.0
Set a detect time of current unbalance.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBI Limit (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 0 ~ 630 A
>UBI Pickup: 30
>UBI Duration: 4.0 Default 10 Step 1A
>UBI Limit: 10
Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element.
If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance status point
does not maked.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.

SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Func (Option)

>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup: 30 Default Disable Step ~
>UBV Duration: 4.0
It is to set event recording of voltage unbalance enable or disable.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Pickup (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 1 ~ 100 %
>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup: 30 Default 30 Step 1%
>UBV Duration: 4.0
Set a detect level of voltage unbalance for Power Quality.
Voltage unbalance is calculated by following formula.
V2
UVrate = × 100
V1

EVRC2A-N6,NT.
SYSTEM SETUP / POWER QUALITY / UBV Duration (Option)

> [POWER QUALITY] Range 0.1 ~ 60.0 sec
>UBV Func: Disable
>UBV Pickup: 30 Default 4.0 Step 0.1 sec
>UBV Duration: 4.0
Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.

EVRC2A-N6,NT.

7. PROTECTION
Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations
Figure 7-1. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

Protective Elements - ANSI Designations
Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations

Protective Elements ANSI Designations
Four shot recloser 79
Phase fast time overcurrent 51P1
Ground fast time overcurrent 51G1
Negative sequence fast time overcurrent 46(51)-1
Phase delay time overcurrent 51P2
Ground delay time overcurrent 51G2
Negative sequence delay time overcurrent 46(51)-2
Sensitive Earth Fault protection 51SEF
Phase directional time control 67P
Ground directional time control 67G
Negative sequence directional time control 67I2
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault 67SEF
Phase instantaneous high current trip 50P1
Ground instantaneous high current trip 50G1
Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip 46(50)1
Phase High current trip lockout 50P2
Ground High current trip lockout 50G2
Negative sequence High current trip lockout 46(50)2
Under voltage 1 27-1
Under voltage 2 27-2
Over voltage 1 59-1
Over voltage 2 59-2
Under frequency 81U
Over frequency 81O
Synchronism check 25
Cold load pickup
Sequence coordination
Loss of Phase

7.1. Reclose (79)

After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose
interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and
each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer.
If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will
continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the
operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts.
If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic.
The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout
or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel.
The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA

[OPERATIONS] Range 1~5
>Lockout-PHA: 4
Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the phase trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip
operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND

Lockout-PHA: 4
>Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the ground trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip
operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF

Lockout-PHA: 4
Lockout-GND: 4 Default 4 Step 1
>Lockout-SEF: 4
Select the total number of the SEF trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip
operations

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ

Lockout-GND: 4
Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 4 Step 1
>Lockout-NEQ: 4
Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.
This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence
trip operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA

Lockout-GND: 4
Lockout-SEF: 4 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-PHA: 2
Select the number of the phase fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining
phase delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND

Lockout-SEF: 4
Fast Curve-PHA: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-GND: 2
Select a number for the ground fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve
operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining
ground delay curve operations.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ

Fast Curve-PHA: 2
Fast Curve-GND: 2 Default 2 Step 1
>Fast Curve-NEQ: 2
Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations.
This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast
curve operations.
The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and
setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining
negative sequence delay curve operations.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reclose 1

[INTERVALS] 0.50 ~ 600.00 sec(prior to Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A)
>Reclose 1: 0.60 Range
Reclose 2: 2.00 0.10 ~ 600.00 sec(from Ver 6.11 of EVRC2A)
Reclose 3: 15.00
Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the
first trip operation and the close operation.

[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Reclose 1: 0.60
>Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
Reclose 3: 15.00

[INTERVALS] Range 1.00 ~ 600.00sec
Reclose 1: 0.60
Reclose 2: 2.00 Default 15.00 Step 0.01
>Reclose 3: 15.00

Reclose 2: 2.00
Reclose 3: 15.00 Default 15.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reclose 4: 15.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(AR)

Reclose 3: 15.00
Reclose 4: 15.00 Default 30.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset T(AR): 30.00
Select Reset time for auto reclose.
The Reset time for auto reclose is used for the recloser to automatically
reclose.
Traditionally, the Reset time for auto reclose setting is used to set time
for a delay longer than the incomplete sequence.
If any overcurrent elements are picked up, the reset timer is reloaded.
Reset timer can only count if all the overcurrent elements are cleared.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / Reset T(LO)

Reclose 4: 15.00
Reset T(AR): 30.00 Default 10.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset T(LO): 10.00
Select the Reset time for lockout.
The auto reclose logic is disabled for a setting time delay after the
recloser is manually/remotely closed. This prevents a fault from manual
reclosing. This delay must be longer than the trip time delay for any
protection not blocked after manual closing.
If no overcurrent trip occurs after a manual close and this timer expires,
the auto reclose logic automatically resets.
Traditionally, the Reset Time from lockout setting is set shorter than the
Reset time for auto reclose setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / INTERVALS / C/P Wait

Reset T(AR): 30.00
Reset T(LO): 10.0 Default 60.00 Step 0.01 sec
>C/P Wait: 60.00
Select the close power waiting time.
This timer is used to set the close power waiting time delay allowed to
reclose. It is activated when the reclose logic is in the reclose cycle
state. If this timer expires, the reclose logic is locked out.

7.1.1. Lockout
The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions :
y After a fault of distribution systems, the RECLOSE ENABLED LED in user interface panel
is not lighted(ON).
y When the high current lockout has occurred.
y The recloser is manually closed and a fault occurs before the expiration of the reset time.
y When recloser is manually opened.
y After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not
change status of the recloser opened.
y The close power waiting time delay has expired.
The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control
and the reset time has expired.
The following diagram shows the typical full protection sequence containing 2F2D (two fast and
two delay) operations followed by lockout.
AMP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
FAULT
CURRENT
* LOCK-OUT *
PICKUP
CURRENT
NORMAL
CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time
(7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC
Figure 7-2. Protection sequence containing 2F2D operations followed by lockout

7.1.2. Reset
If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence
automatically reset after passing the reset time interval.
If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the
completion of the remaining sequence.
The following block diagram shows the reset sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the
fault current is cleared.
AMP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
FAULT
CURRENT
AUTO RESET
TIME
* RESET *
PICKUP
CURRENT
NOMAL
CURRENT
TIME
(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time
(3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time
(5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC
Figure 7-3. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared

7.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)

The EVRC2A has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element
contained in the EVR2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase
time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an
inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION
ENABLED] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to
respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external
devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current
curves are included in the EVRC2A.
A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote
control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

Phase Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

[PICKUP CURRENT(A)] Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
>Phase: 500
Ground: 250 Default 500 Step 1A
S.E.F: OFF
Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent elements.
Phase Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Function

[PHASE FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default TRIP Step ~
Curve: ANSI-STI
If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts
a TRIP condition, Trip operates.
If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature
asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Relays(0-8)

[PHASE FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
>Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step 1
Curve: ANSI-STI
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
Maximum 4 of Relay outputs can be selected to operate output signal.
0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.
1234 : Operate output signal through 1, 2, 3, 4 Output Relay.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Curve

[PHASE FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default ANSI-STI Step ~
>Curve: ANSI-STI
Select the desired curve type :
ANSI : Moderately, Normally, Very, Extremely, Short Inverse,
Definite Time(1s ,10s)
User programmable curves : U1,U2,U3,U4
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Time Adder

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
Time Dial: 0.50 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Adder: 0.00
An additional time delay is added to the time delay resulting from the
time overcurrent curve function.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / M.R.T

[PHASE FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
Time Adder: 0.00 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
The minimum time delay that will occur between pickup and trip, even
if the time delay is shorter.
This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse
coordination.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

[PHASE FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
M.R.T: 0.00 Default INST Step ~
>Reset Method: INST
Overcurrent tripping time calculations are made with an internal energy
Capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy
capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent trip is generated. If less
than 100% is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below
the dropout threshold of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced.
Two methods of this resetting operation are available, Instantaneous
and Linear. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications
with other relays, such as most static units, which set the energy
capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset
threshold. The Linear selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical units.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time

[PHASE FAST] Range OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Reset Method: INST Default OFF Step 1sec
>Low Set DT: OFF
Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time
adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater
than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,

NT.
Phase Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time
overcurrent.

7.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G)

The EVRC2A has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element
in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for
distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The
ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for
an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial,
time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that
time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and
operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time
overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION
ENABLED] and [GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to
closely coordinate with other protection elements within the EVRC2A and other external devices
on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are
included in the EVRC2A.
A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time
current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to
the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other
instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution
system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when
the current level measured by the EVRC2A drops below the pickup setting for one cycle.
control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a
period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

Ground Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the phase pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground

>Phase: 500
>Ground: 250 Default 250 Step 1A
S.E.F: OFF
Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent elements.
Ground Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the ground fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Function

[GROUND FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Curve: ANSI-STI
a TRIP condition, which will operate the Trip.
asserts a TRIP&AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Relays(0-8)

[GROUND FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
Curve: ANSI-STI
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Curve

[GROUND FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
>Curve: ANSI-STI

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Dial

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-STI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial set point allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Time Adder

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
>Time Adder: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / M.R.T

[GROUND FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
>M.R.T: 0.00
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Reset Method

[GROUND FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
>Reset Method: INST

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time

[GROUND FAST] Range OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from version 6.03 of EVRC2A-N6,

NT.
Ground Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time
overcurrent.

7.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase
to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The
sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and
the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, EVRC2A has the separate SEF terminal on side panel.
This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s (standard) or connected to a
separate window type ZCT.
The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current. The SEF element is enabled in
the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [SEF ENABLED]
in user interface panel.
For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero
sequence voltage(V0). The VD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded.
The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.
SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F
[PICKUP CURRENT(A)] OFF, 4 ~ 160A (prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A)
>Phase: 500 Range*
>Ground: 250 OFF, 1 ~ 160A (from Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A)
>S.E.F: OFF
Default OFF Step 1A
Set the pickup current of SEF element.
NOTE : The user shall request a CT that satisfies the relevant

accuracy when setting below 2A so that the SEF element
operates properly.
NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the
setting range of this item is “OFF, 0.1~16.0 (0.1A Step)”. It
is possible to check whether the product is dispatched with
ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE” menu. Refer to “9.4. Control Type”.

SEF Element Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Function
[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Time Delay: 1.00
asserts a TRIP & AR condition, it trips and alarms.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Relays(0-8)

[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
Time Delay: 1.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / SEF ELEMENT / Time Delay

[ SEF ELEMENT ] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 1.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 1.00
The Time delay of Sensitive Earth Fault setting programs a definite
time delay for the Sensitive Earth Fault. If set to zero, phase high
current trip operates instantaneously.

7.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46)

The EVRC2A has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence
element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence
overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The
negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping
using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value,
curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting, and reset type.
The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and
[PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent
element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the EVRC2A and other external
devices on the distribution system.
The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset
mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to
coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective
equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element
will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for
one cycle.
control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from
tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.
NEG Pickup Current Setup

The following setting is used to program the NEQ pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq

Ground: 250
S.E.F: OFF Default OFF Step 1A
>NEG Seq: OFF
Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent elements.

Negative Sequence Fast Time Overcurrent Setup

The following setting is used to program the negative sequence fast time overcurrent element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Function

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Curve: ANSI-STI
asserts a TRIP condition, TRIP and any other selected output relays
operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Relays(0-8)

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
Curve: ANSI-STI
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range ANSI-MI, ANSI-NI, … , KG(165)
Function: TRIP
>Curve: ANSI-STI
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.05 ~ 15.00
Relays(0-8): OFF
Curve: ANSI-SI Default 0.50 Step 0.01
>Time Dial: 0.50
A time dial setpoint allows shifting of the selected base curve in the
vertical time axis.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Adder

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Curve: ANSI-STI
>Time Adder: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Time Dial: 0.50
>M.R.T: 0.00
if the time delay is shorter. This function can be useful for other
protective device and line fuse coordination.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method

[NEG SEQ FAST] Range INST, LINEAR
Time Adder: 0.00
>Reset Method: INST
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time
[NEG SEQ FAST] Range OFF, 1 ~ 600sec
>M.R.T: 0.00
>Low Set DT: OFF
operation.
NOTE : This setting is supported from vesion 6.03 of EVRC2A-

N6, NT.

Negative Sequence Delay Time Overcurrent Setup

The negative sequence delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the negative
sequence fast time overcurrent.

7.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1)

The EVRC2A has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the
EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the
phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary,
Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface panel.
Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Function

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default OFF Step ~
Pickup(A): 4000
If function = OFF, the feature is not operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 4000
Selects the required relays to operate when the feature generates a Trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 4000 Step 1A
>Pickup(A): 4000
Set the pickup current of Phase High Current Trip Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High Current
Trip Element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(A): 4000 Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay: 0.00
The Time delay of phase high current trip setting programs a definite
time delay for the phase high current trip. If set to zero, phase high
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-PHA / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 4000
Time Delay: 0.00 Default OFF Step 1
>Active Trip: OFF
If Active Trip = OFF, the feature is not operate.
If Active Trip = 2, then phase high current trip is enabled for the
second trip operation and every following trip operation.

7.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1)

The EVRC2A has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the
EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground
high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or
faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled
in the Primary, Alternate settings both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and [GROUND
ENABLED] in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load
pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Function

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 4000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 4000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup(A): 4000
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Trip Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High Current
Trip Element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-GND / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 4000
>Active Trip: OFF

7.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1)

The negative sequence high current trip in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as
connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a
definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster
than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip
element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION] on user interface
panel.
The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for
negative sequence high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Function

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 4000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 4000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup(A)

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup(A): 4000
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Trip Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High
Current Trip Element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Active Trip

[ H/C TRIP-NEQ ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 4000
>Active Trip: OFF

7.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2)

The EVRC2A has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element
in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The
phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to
any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value,
Lockout is operated.
The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to
the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current.
This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case
of permanent fault.
The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than
and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the
Primary, Alternate setting and [PROTECTION ENABLED] in user interface panel.
The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase
high current trip.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup(A): 8000
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.
Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 8000
>Active Trip: OFF

7.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2)

The EVRC2A has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout
element in the EVRC2A, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs.
The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current.
The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to
or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is
enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both [PROTECTION ENABLED] and
[GROUND ENABLED] in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected
by the cold load pickup scheme.
The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for
ground high current lockout.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup(A): 8000
Set the pickup current of Ground High Current Lockout Element.
Lockout Element.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 8000
>Active Trip: OFF

7.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2)

The EVRC2A has a negative sequence high current lockout element. Negative sequence high
current lockout element in the EVRC2A is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the
current inputs. The negative sequence high current lockout element provides a definite time
delay characteristic versus current.
The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the
negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element
is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and [PROTECTION ENABLED] on user interface
panel.
Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme.
The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be
enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Function

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Relays(0-8)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(A): 8000

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Pickup(A)

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 10 ~ 20000 A
Function: OFF
>Pickup(A): 8000
Set the pickup current of Negative Seq. High Current Lockout Element.
This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq. High
Current Lockout Element.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Time Delay

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 0.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ / Active Trip

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEQ ] Range OFF, 1 ~ 5
Pickup(A): 8000
>Active Trip: OFF

7.12. Cold Load Pickup

The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused
by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. EVRC2A provides
“CLPU-Type 1” to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current
occurring by the closing of device on a power line and “CLPU-Type 2” to prevent protection
elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a
transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.
7.12.1. Cold Load Pickup – Type 1

The settings of “CLPU-Type 1” are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or
negative phase over current element.
In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection
element will be operated under settings of “CLPU-Type 1” function at the restoration of load
supply.
NOTE:
According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will
be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If
“NO” is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (52A) by local or remote control.
When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent
pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, EVRC2A increases the pickup
level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection
element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated
regardless of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout
are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function)
If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold
load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number
of shots.
A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is
applied at the restoration of load supply. If the “Make use ‘1’” is set to be “YES”, the algorithm

is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If “NO”
is set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the
recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the
protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately.
If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain
outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of
the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration
of load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time
(RMT) is expired.
Non Trip Area Trip Area

Time
Delay Curve
Current
Overcurrent Cold load
Pickup Level Pickup Level
Figure 7-4. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic
The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules.
The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the
cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual
close or restoration of load current.
If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load
pickup current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush
Current 1 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).

If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection
functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush
Current 2 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). After RMT, the
protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent
pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the
Inrush Current 3 in “Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).
Current
Outage time Restore Minimum Time
Inrush current 1
CLPU Trip
Pickup Level
Inrush current 2
Trip
Overcurrent
Pickup Level
Inrush current 3
Time
Figure 7-5. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic
If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher
than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and
high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.

7.12.2. Cold Load Pickup – Type 2

In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over
current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy
load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time
overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Up

At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is
risen as follows.
⎛ Without Supply Time ⎞

Operational Cold Load Multi' = 1 + ⎜⎜ × ( E − CLP Multi' −1) ⎟⎟
⎝ E − CLP Time ⎠
As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over
30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis
set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the
minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.
Over Current Pickup Level Step Down

If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over
Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes
1.
When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the
cold load multiple in “Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.
NOTE:
The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate
overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working
current.

Figure 7-6. Cold Load Multipilier
7.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.
CLPU COMMON Setup

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Function
[CLPU-COMMON] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: TRIP
Make use ‘I’: NO
If function = Trip, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Relays

[CLPU-COMMON] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: TRIP
Make use ‘I’: NO

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-COMMON/ Make use ‘I’
[CLPU-COMMON] Range NO,YES
Function: TRIP
Relays(0-8): OFF Default NO Step ~
>Make use ‘I’: NO
This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup
function.
If “YES” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load
current is restored (over 2A).
If “NO” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a
recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.
CLPU-TYPE1 Setup
This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / PHA

[CLPU-TYPE1] Range 10 ~ 20000A
>PHA(A): 2000
GND(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
>SEF(A): 20
Selects the raised pickup current for the phase overcurrent element
while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / GND

>PHA(A): 2000
>GND(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
>SEF(A): 20
Selects the raised pickup current for the ground overcurrent element
while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / SEF

[CLPU-TYPE1] Range* 4 ~ 2000A
PHA(A): 2000
GND(A): 2000 Default 20 Step 1A
>SEF(A): 20
Selects the raised pickup current for the SEF overcurrent element while
cold load pickup feature is activated.
NOTE : For the products that are dispatched with ZCT installed, the
setting range of this item is “0.4~200.0A (0.1A Step)”. It is
possible to check whether the product is dispatched with
ZCT installed by checking “MAIN MENU/ STATUS/
CONTROL TYPE” menu. Refer to “9.4. Control Type”.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1/ NEQ

GND(A): 2000
SEF(A): 2000 Default 2000 Step 1A
>NEQ(A): 2000
Selects the raised pickup current for the negative sequence overcurrent
element while cold load pickup feature is activated.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Outage Time

[CLPU-TYPE1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
SEF(A): 2000
NEQ(A): 2000 Default 10.0 Step 0.01 sec
>Outage Time: 10.0
Select the outage time required for a open of recloser to be considered
cold.
Figure 7-7. Outage Time Logic Diagram
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Time

NEQ(A): 2.00
Outage Time: 10.0 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>RMT Time: 5.00
Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load.
The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for
overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal
pickup level.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / RMT Func-PHA

[CLPU-TYPE1] Range OFF, ON
Outage Time: 10.0
RMT Time: 5.00 Default ON Step ~
>RMT Func-PHA: ON
Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function.
ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase
overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from
Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level).
OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT
time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over
current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst Time-
PHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and
over current protection function operates.

※. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT Func-
PHA above.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE1 / Reset Time

RMT Func-SEF: ON
RMT Func-NEQ: ON Default 0.60 Step 0.01 sec
>Reset Time: 0.60
Select the cold load reset time required for the inrush load.
If the cold load currents drop below nominal pickup levels, the cold
load pickup feature is returned the normal sequence when the cold load
reset time expires.
CLPU-TYPE2 Setup
This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2 / E-CLP Multi’

[CLPU-TYPE2] Range 0.0 (OFF),1.0~5.0
>E-CLP Multi’: 2.0
E-CLP Time(m): 10 Default 2.0 Step 0.1
Set the multiple of cold load. If OFF is set, the cold load multiple is not
applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied
for overcurrent pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / COLD LOAD PICKUP / CLPU-TYPE2/ E-CLP Time

[CLPU-TYPE2] Range 1~720min
>E-CLP Multi’: 2.0
>E-CLP Time(m): 10 Default 10 Step 1
Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup
level is risen or dropped.

7.13. Directional Controls (67)

The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional
Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding
faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, neutral, sensitive
ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements.
If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in
forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all
directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.
The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be
different in the Primary and Alternate settings.
NOTE : In case of VD(CVD or RVD) type Recloser, EVRC2A only measures voltages
without checking directional elements.
7.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P)

The positive sequence voltage V1 provides the direction of phase pole in the power system.
The phase direction is determined as comparing the positive sequence voltage(V1) to the
direction of the positive sequence current(I1). The maximum torque angle is set between ∠0 to
∠359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠300 degree over V1.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the phase direction control will
lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the phase
overcurrent element, which is non-directional.
The phase direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip for current
flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
Following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I1 directional polarization in the complex plane.

Polarizing Referance
Voltage:
V1
Typical Fault Angle
Ze
ro
T
e
orq
Lin
ue
ue
o rq
I1 T
Lin
um
im
e
M ax
Maximum Torque Angle :

set 300 degree
ard
rw
Fo
rse
ve
Re
Figure 7-8. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization
The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / Type

[PHASE DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.T.A: 300 Default OFF Step ~
M.P.V: 0.20
OFF : None direction
FOR : Forward direction
REV : Reverse direction
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.T.A

[PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
>M.T.A: 300 Default 300 Step 1 degree
M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle
setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing
voltage.
For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be
approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V

[PHASE DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
M.T.A: 300 Default 0.20 Step 0.01
>M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage as a fraction of the secondary
nominal voltage.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / BLOCK OC

[PHASE DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 300
M.P.V: 0.20 Default NO Step ~
>BLOCK OC: NO
The BLOCK OC setting determines the overcurrent tripping conditions
when the polarizing voltage drops below minimum polarizing voltage.
If BLOCK OC = NO,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be permitted.
If BLOCK OC = YES,
then tripping by the overcurrent elements will be blocked.
NOTE )
EVRC2A version prior to 5.1 this setting is applied conversely.
For example, “NO” indicates that directional elements will be
blocked by M.P.V. “YES” indicates that directional elements will
be operated regardless of M.P.V.
7.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

The zero sequence voltage 3V0 provides the direction of ground control in the power system. The
ground direction is determined as comparing the zero sequence voltage(3V0) to the direction of
the zero sequence current(Ig). The Maximum Torque Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree.
The factory default value for maximum torque angle has a lead of ∠135 degree over 3V0.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the ground direction control
will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to the
ground overcurrent element, which is non-directional.
The ground direction control can be programmed to either non-direction or provide a trip for
current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.

The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for Ig directional polarization in the complex
plane.
-V0
ne
Li
ue
Fault Current
rq
Ze
To
Ig
ro
um
To
im
rq
ax
ue
M
Li
ne
d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re
V0
Voltage:
Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for Ig Directional Polarization
The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / Type

[GROUND DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.P.V: 0.20

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / GROUND DIRECTION / M.T.A

[GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting
determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage.
For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the
ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠135 degree.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum
torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / PHASE DIRECTION / M.P.V

[GROUND DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
>M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.
For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING/PROTECTION/DIRECTION/GROUND DIRECTION/BLOCK OC

[GROUND DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 135
>BLOCK OC: NO

If BLOCK OC = NO,
If BLOCK OC = YES,
NOTE )

7.13.3. SEF Directional Controls (67SEF)

The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls.
7.13.4. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

The negative sequence voltage V2 provides the direction of negative sequence pole in the power
system. The negative sequence direction control is determined as comparing the negative
sequence voltage(V2) to the direction of the negative sequence current(I2). The Maximum Torque
Angle is set between ∠0 to ∠359 degree. The factory default value for maximum torque angle
has a lead of ∠135 degree over V2.
If the polarized voltage drops below minimum polarized voltage, the negative sequence direction
control will lose direction and will not trip. Then any fault on the distribution line may trip due to
the negative sequence overcurrent element which is non-directional.
The negative sequence direction control can be programmed for non-direction or to provide a trip
for current flow in the forward or reverse direction only.
The following diagram shows the phasor diagram for I2 directional polarization in the complex
plane.

-V2
ne
Li
ue
Fault Current
rq
Ze
To
ro I2
um
To
im
rq
ax
ue
M
Li
ne
Maximum Torque Angle :

set 135 degree
d
ar
rw
Fo
e
rs
ve
Re
Voltage:
V2
Figure 7-10. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization
The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / Type

[NEQ DIRECTION] Range OFF, FOR, REV
>Type: OFF
M.P.V: 0.20
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.T.A

[NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 359 degree
Type: OFF
M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the maximum torque angle. The maximum torque angle setting
determines the directional operating current for the polarizing voltage.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / M.P.V

[NEQ DIRECTION] Range 0 ~ 1.25 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)
Type: OFF
>M.P.V: 0.20
Enter the minimum polarizing voltage.
For systems with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this
M.P.V will be approximately 0.20 x VT.
For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the M.P.V
will be approximately 0.10 x VT.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / DIRECTION / NEQ DIRECTION / BLOCK OC

[NEQ DIRECTION] Range NO, YES
M.T.A: 135
>BLOCK OC: NO
If BLOCK OC = NO,
If BLOCK OC = YES,
NOTE )

7.14. Undervoltage (27)

Two undervoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage drops
below a specified voltage for a specified time.
The undervoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings. The
undervoltage element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two
phase and three phase.
The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent
protective elements.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is
disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all
undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect
operation.
Undervoltage 1 Setup
The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Function

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.70
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.70

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 0.70 Step 0.01
>Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage.
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(70/100) = 0.70 ×
VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.70 Default 5.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Time Delay : 5.00
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Min. V(xVT)

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 × VT(secondary nominal voltage)
Pickup(xVT): 0.70
Time Delay : 5.00 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10
Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage.
Used to prevent the undervoltage 1 element for voltage below this
level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip
condition.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / UNDER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type

[UNDER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Time Delay : 5.00
Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 1P Step ~
>Pickup Type: 1P
Select the type of phase required for operation.
1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is under the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are under the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are under
the pickup voltage level.
Undervoltage 2 Setup
The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

7.15. Overvoltage (59)

Two overvoltage elements are provided for trip, alarm and control when the voltage rises above a
specified voltage for a specified time.
The overvoltage element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings . The overvoltage
element can be selected the type of operation required with any one phase, any two phase and
three phase.
When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled
from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage
elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.
Overvoltage 1 Setup
The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Function

[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 1.20
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Relays(0-8)

[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 1.20
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup(xVT)

[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT
Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 1.20
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100 V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage exceeds 120 V, enter 120 / 100 = 1.20
for the pickup.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Time Delay

[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay : 5.00
Set the definite time delay.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / VOLTAGE / OVER VOLTAGE 1 / Pickup Type

[OVER VOLTAGE 1] Range 1P, 2P, 3P
Pickup(xVT): 1.20
Time Delay : 5.00 Default 1P Step ~
>Pickup Type: 1P
Select the type of phase required for operation.
1P : Function operates when one or more than one phase voltage value
is over the pickup voltage level.
2P : Function operates when two or more than two phase voltage
values are over the pickup voltage level.
3P : Function operates when all three phase voltage values are over the
pickup voltage level.
Overvoltage 2 Setup
The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

7.16. Frequency(81)
EVRC2A has underfrequency and overfrequency elements to detect unusual frequency in power
system. Explanation for each element is below.
Underfrequency (81U)
Underfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency drops below
a specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The underfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.
The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency
is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Overfrequency (81O)
Overfrequency element is provided for trip, alarm and control when the frequency rises above a
specified frequency setting for a specified time delay.
The overfrequency element can be ON or OFF in the Primary, Alternate settings.
The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for
Wye connected VTs and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.
The overfrequency minimum voltage and overfrequency minimum current are used to prevent
incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the overfrequency is
disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods.
Frequency Setup
The underfrequency and overfrequency element should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Function

[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Relays(0-8)

[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Pickup(Hz)

[[FREQUENCY] Range 40.00 ~ 60.00 Hz
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 45.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For
example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required
at 55.00㎐, enter 55.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Underfreqency Time Delay

[FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Under TD: 2.00
Set the definite time delay for underfrequency.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Pickup(Hz)

[[FREQUENCY] Range 50.00 ~ 70.00 Hz
Under Pu(Hz): 55.00
Under TD: 2.00 Default 55.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>Over Pu(Hz): 65.00
Enter the level of which the overfrequency element is to pickup. For
example, if the system frequency is 60㎐, and load shedding is required
at 65.00㎐, enter 65.00 for this setting.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Overfreqency Time Delay

Under TD: 2.00
Over Pu(Hz): 65.00 Default 6.00 Step 0.01 sec
>Over TD: 6.00
Set the definite time delay for Overfrequency.

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. V(xVT)

[FREQUENCY] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
>Over TD: 6.00
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>Min. I(A): 10
Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the frequency element to
Operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / Min. I(A)

[FREQUENCY] Range 10 ~ 1600A
>Over TD: 6.00
>Min. V(xVT): 0.10 Default 10 Step 1A
>Min. I(A): 10
Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the
frequency element to operate.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL Func’

[FREQUENCY] Range OFF, ON
>Min. I(A): 10
>NFCL Func’: OFF Default OFF Step ~
>NFCL TD: 60.0
Enable or disable “CLOSE” function when the frequency becomes
normal.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / FREQUENCY / NFCL TD

>Min. I(A): 0.01
>NFCL Func’: OFF Default 60.0 Step 0.1
>NFCL TD: 60.0
Set the time delay before “CLOSE” operation.

7.17. Other Element

7.17.1. Sequence Coordination
When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, EVRC2A
contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in
both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination
feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up
Recloser detects a fault current.
The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature.
1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip
operations and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected
in series.
2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series.
3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100
ms) should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to
those of Down-line Reclosers.
4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all
Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser
during the reclose operation of Down-lines.
The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'

[ OTHER ELEMENT ] Range OFF, ON
>Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
L.O Priority: GND Default OFF Step ~
F/I Reset: AUTO
Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary
operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are
connected in series.

If function = ON, the feature is operational.

As shown in “Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence

Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in
distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements.
During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by
TRIP with Down-line Recloser, the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is
increased one step.
Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at
the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence
Coordination function cannot be operated.
Increase Trip Counter without Trip
Starting
Reset Time
Counter
Close
Back Up EVR 1 Open
Close
Down line EVR 2
Lockout Status
Open
Time
Faulted
Figure 7-11. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram
7.17.2. Other Element

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority
[OTHER ELEMENT] Range PHA, GND
Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
>L.O Priority: GND Default GND Step ~
F/I Reset: AUTO
Lockout priority
PHA : Phase prior
GND : Ground prior

PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset

[OTHER ELEMENT] Range AUTO, MANUAL
Seq’ Coordi’: OFF
L.O Priority: GND Default AUTO Step ~
>F/I Reset: AUTO
Faulted Indicator reset method
AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or

shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes
normal.
MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close

[OTHER ELEMENT] Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec
L.O Priority: GND
F/I Reset: AUTO Default 0.00 Step 0.01 sec
>D/T M-Close: 0.00
Time delay for manual close

7.18. Time Overcurrent Curves

The EVRC2A is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves, user-defined
curves and all 37 non standard recloser curves are available.
A Configuration setting determines whether elements set to use ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves,
ESB curves, user-defined curves reset instantaneously, or corresponding with electromechanical.
The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3.
The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :
ANSI/IEEE
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA)
IEC
Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA)
ESB
USER-DEFINED
Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))
Table 7-2. Curve Factor

TD Time dial
TA Time adder
α, β, γ Characteristic constant
M Multiples of pickup current
Rt Reset characteristic constant
NOTE )
1) “Time Dial” and “Time Adder” settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are
applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively.
2) “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15㎸ or 27㎸,
otherwise which added 30㎳(±4㎳) are used when it is 38㎸.

Related Setting Menu
1) USER CURVE 1
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a
[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
>Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0000 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
User defined curve factor α
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor a: 59.5000
>Factor b: 2.0000 Default 2.0000 Step 0.0001
Factor r: 1.8000
User defined curve factor β
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor a: 59.5000
Factor b: 2.0000 Default 1.8000 Step 0.0001
>Factor r: 1.8000
User defined curve factor γ
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / USER CURVE SET / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

[USER CURVE 1] Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999
Factor b: 2.0000
Factor r: 1.8000 Default 59.5000 Step 0.0001
>Factor rt: 59.5000
User defined curve factor rt
2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 :
USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above

Standard Curve Coefficients
Table 7-3. ANSI/IEEE

Curves α β γ Rt
Moderately Inverse 0.0107 0.020 0.0231 1.0700
Normally Inverse 5.9500 2.000 0.18 5.9500
Very Inverse 3.985 2.000 0.095 3.985
Extremely Inverse 5.9100 2.000 0.0345 5.9100
Short Time Inverse 3.56e-3 0.02 1.95e-2 0.356
Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.000 0.0475 1.992
Table 7-4. IEC

Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.1400 0.0200 0.0 9.700
Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500
Extremely Inverse 80.000 2.000 0.0 80.000
Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00
Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500
Table 7-5. ESB

Curves α β γ Rt
Standard Inverse 0.011 0.02 0.042 9.000
Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985
Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94
Table 7-6. User Defined

Curves α β γ Rt
User1 59.5000 2.0000 1.8000 59.5000
User2 39.8500 2.0000 0.9500 39.8500
User3 59.1000 2.0000 0.3450 59.1000
User4 5.6700 2.0000 0.0352 5.6700

Table 7-7. Definite Time

Curves α β γ Rt
Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0
Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0
Table 7-8. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison recloser curves
Phase Ground
Old New Old New
A 101 1 102
B 117 2 135
C 133 3 140
D 116 4 106
E 132 5 114
F 163 6 136
H 122 7 152
J 164 8 113
KP 162 8* 111
L 107 9 131
M 118 11 141
N 104 13 142
P 115 14 119
R 105 15 112
T 161 16 139
V 137 17 103
W 138 18 151
Y 120 KG 165
Z 134 - -

1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE 70
60 : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSE 60
50 CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME 50
40
VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
13.00
2 2
11.00
TIME(SECONDS)
9.00
7.00
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8
5.00 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 3.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
0.05 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
6k
8k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT
Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSE 60
40 VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
15.00
13.00
2 11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)
7.00
1 1
0.9 5.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 4.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
3.00
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
2.00
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.50 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI VERY INVERSE 60
40
VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
15.00
13.00
1
11.00 1
0.9 9.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 7.00 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 5.00 0.5
0.4 4.00 0.4
0.3 3.00 0.3
0.2 2.00 0.2
0.1 1.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.50 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE
60 60
: ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSE
50 50
CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIME
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 15.00 0.6
0.5 13.00 0.5
11.00
0.4 0.4
9.00
0.3 0.3
7.00
0.2 5.00 0.2
4.00
3.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 2.00 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 1.00 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.50 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
6k
7k
8k
9k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 15.00 1
0.9 13.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 11.00 0.7
0.6 9.00 0.6
0.5 7.00 0.5
0.4 0.4
5.00
0.3 0.3
4.00
0.2 3.00 0.2
2.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 1.00 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.50
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
3k
4k
5k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
2k
6k
7k
8k
9k
Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 15.00 0.7
0.6 13.00 0.6
11.00
0.5 0.5
9.00
0.4 0.4
7.00
0.3 0.3
5.00
0.2 4.00 0.2
3.00
0.1 2.00 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 1.00 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.50
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC STANDARD INVERSE 60
40 VARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 1 2
TIME(SECONDS)
0.8
0.7
0.6
1 0.5 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.4 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.3 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.2 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.1 0.2
0.1 0.05 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves

8) IEC Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
500
600
700
800
400
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC VERY INVERSE 60
40
VARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.8
0.3 0.7 0.3
0.6
0.5
0.2 0.2
0.4
0.3
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.2 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.1
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
6k
7k
9k
1k
2k
3k
5k
8k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves

9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08
1.00 0.08
0.07 0.8 0.07
0.06 0.7 0.06
0.05 0.6 0.05
0.04 0.5 0.04

0.4
0.03 0.03
0.3
0.02 0.02
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
1.00
4 4
0.8
3 0. 7 3
0. 6
0. 5
2 2
0. 4
TIME(SECONDS)
0. 3
1 1
0.9 0.2 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.1
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.05
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
1.00
0.3 0.3
0.8
0.7
0.2 0.6 0.2
0.5
0.4
0.1 0.3 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.2
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.1
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.05
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

12) ESB Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB INVERSE 60
40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 15.00 3
13.00
2
11.00 2
9.00
TIME(SECONDS)
7.00
1 5.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 4.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 3.00 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 2.00 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 1.00 0.2
0.1 0.50 0.1

0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves

13) ESB Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB VERY INVERSE 60
40
VARIATIONS ±5% 0.01 SECONDS 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
15.00
TIME(SECONDS)
13.00
11.00
1 9.00 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 7.00 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
5.00
0.5 0.5
4.00
0.4 0.4
3.00
0.3 0.3
2.00
0.2 0.2
1.00
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves

14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSE 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 15.00 7
6 6
13.00
5 11.00 5
4 9.00 4
3 7.00 3
5.00
2 2
4.00
TIME(SECONDS)
3.00
1 1
0.9 2.00 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
1.00
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.50
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

15) Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : D1, D2 60
30 30
20 20
10 D2 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 D1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)

16) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : A, B, C, D, E 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 C 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
B
0.06 D E 0.06
0.05 0.05
A
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-27. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

17) Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
8k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : KP, L, M, N 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
KP
0.1 0.1
0.09 L 0.09
0.08 M 0.08
0.07 0.07
N
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (KP, L, M, N)

18) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : P, R, T, V 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
V
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1
T 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 R 0.06
0.05 P 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1k
3k
8k
9k
10k
Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

19) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)
100
300
200
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
8k
9k
2k
4k
5k
6k
7k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : W, Y, Z 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
Z
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
W
0.2 0.2
Y
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
4k
200
400
500
600
700
1k
2k
3k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
10k
100
300
800
900
Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

20) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
6k
7k
8k
9k
5k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 3 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
2
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 4 0.07
0.06 1 0.06
0.05 0.05
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

21) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)
100
200
300
500
600
700
800
400
900
10k
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 60
: 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9
30 7 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 9 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
8
0.1 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 8* 0.05
6
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
6k
7k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
8k
9k
Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

RECLOS
SER CONTR
ROL EVRC2A
A-N6,NT http
p://www.enttecene.co.krr
22) Non
N Standardd Curves (11,, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
Figure 7-333. Non Standdard Curvess (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 118)
ENHA
ANCED TEC
CHNOLOGY
Y 205
23) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
10k
1k
3k
4k
5k
6k
7k
8k
9k
2k
100 100
90 90
80 80
60 : F, H, J, KG 60
30 30
20 20
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
TIME(SECONDS)
1 1
0.9 0.9
0.8 0.8
0.7 0.7
0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
F J
0.1 KG 0.1
0.09 0.09
0.08 0.08
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
H
0.04 0.04
0.03 0.03
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
1k
2k
3k
4k
5k
7k
9k
10k
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
6k
8k
Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

7.19. Loss of Phase - Option

EVRC2A has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when
loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate
settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of EVRC2A.
If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or
two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker
determines Loss of Phase.
The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Function

[LOSS OF PHASE] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.30
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Relays(0-8)

[LOSS OF PHASE] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Pickup(xVT): 0.30
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup(xVT)

[LOSS OF PHASE] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30
For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is
required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 ×
VT for the pickup.
PRIMARY SETTING / PROTECTION / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay

[LOSS OF PHASE] Range 0.10 ~ 100.00 sec
Relays(0-8): OFF
>Time Delay: 20.00
The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip.

8. MONITORING
EVRC2A has Monitoring function for following items and also has functions for user to output
Alarm signal or Trip signal.
y DEMAND
y SYNCHRO CHECK
y TRIP COUNTER
y RECLOSER WEAR
y BATTERY TEST
y FAULT LOCATOR
y GAS LOW LOCK – Option
y EXT’ TRIP & LOCK – Option
y LIVE LOAD BLOCK – Option
8.1. Demand
8.1.1. Description
EVRC2A is programmed to monitor following items to be operated as user sets.
y Phase Current demand value
y Ground current demand value
y Negative sequence current demand value
8.1.2. Related Setting Menu

1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Demand elements were picked up.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Function
[DEMAND] Range OFF, TRIP, TR&AR
>Function: OFF
Type: THM
OFF : OFF Monitoring
TRIP : Generates Trip signal
TR&AR : Generate Trip and Alarm signal

2) Alarm Output Relay Setting

Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Relays(0-8)
[DEMAND] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Type: THM
0000 : No Output Relay is selected.
3) Demand Method Setting

Setting for Demand calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Type
[DEMAND] Range THM, ROL
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default THM Step ~
>Type: THM
THM : Calculated by Thermal Exponential demand.
ROL : Calculated Rolling demand.
4) Time constant Setting

Setting for 90% Response time in Thermal calculation method.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / Time Constant(m)
[DEMAND] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Relays(0-8): OFF
Type: THM Default 5 Step ~
>Time Constant(m): 5
Enter the time required for a steady state current to indicate 90% of the
actual value.
5) Phase demand pickup current setting

Setting for Phase demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / PHA PU(A)
[DEMAND] Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600A
Type: THM
Time Constant(m): 5 Default 600A Step 1A
>PHA PU(A): 600
Set Phase demand pickup current.

6) Ground demand pickup current Setting

Setting for Ground demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / GND PU(A)
Time Constant(m): 5
PHA PU(A): 600 Default 300A Step 1A
>GND PU(A): 300
Set Ground demand pickup current.
7) Negative sequence demand pickup current Setting

Setting for Negative sequence demand pickup current.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND / NEQ PU(A)
PHA PU(A): 600
GND PU(A): 300 Default 600A Step 1A
>NEQ PU(A): 600
Set Negative sequence demand pickup current.

8.2. Synchronism Check (25)

EVRC2A provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism
voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and
frequency.
If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close
with the exception of automatic reclose for fault.
When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check
can allow for local/remote close.
If EVRC2A is the type of VD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load
side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral
voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser.
The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
If function = ALARM, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Relays(0-8)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an
Alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max(xVT)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 1.25
Function: OFF
>D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this
level.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min(xVT)

Relays(0-8): OFF
D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50 Default 0.85 Step 0.01
>L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check.
Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this
level.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)

D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85 Default 0.10 Step 0.01
>M.V.D(V): 0.10
Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages.
A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0 ~ 100 deg
L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85
M.V.D(V): 0.10 Default 15 Step 1 deg
>M.A.D(Deg): 15
Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages.
An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below
this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range 0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz
M.V.D(V): 0.10
M.A.D(Deg): 15 Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz
>M.F.D(Hz): 2.00
Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages.
A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this
value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase

[SYNCHROCHECK] Range R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)
M.A.D(Deg): 15
M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 Default R(AB) Step ~
>Sync Phase: R(AB)
Select the synchronism check phase on load side.

8.3. Trip Counter

8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation
EVRC2A records counter related with System operation. Especially Trip Counter is operated
depending on Monitoring function set by user.
y Trip : Records trip operation count
y Fault : Records Fault count
y System Restart : Records system restart count
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS

[ COUNTER ]
1.TRIP : 00000
2.FAULT : 00000 User can confirm in “MAIN MENU/MAINTENANCE/COUNTERS”
3.RESTART: 00011

1) Function Setting
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter reaches Limit value set by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Function
[TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: OFF
Limit: 10000
OFF : OFF Monitoring
ALARM : Generate Alarm signal
2) Alarm Output Relay Setting

Select Relay output for alarm.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Relays(0-8)
[TRIP COUNTER] Range OFF, 0 ~ 8
Function: OFF
Limit: 10000
0000(off) : No Output Relay is selected.

3) Limit value Setting

Setting for Trip Counter Monitor value.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Limit
[TRIP COUNTER] Range 1 ~ 20000
Function: OFF
Relays(0-8): OFF Default 10000 Step 1
>Limit: 10000
Select for system to operate when Trip Counter limit value was picked
up.
4) Clear value Setting

Use to synchronize EVRC2A counter with Recloser Counter.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / TRIP COUNTER / Counter set
[TRIP COUNTER] Range 0 ~ 10000
Relays(0-8): OFF
Limit: 10000 Default 0 Step 1
>Counter set: 0
Enters a value for Trip Counter Clear.
5) Stored Value Clear

Select “7.Counter” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA”
to clear the Trip Counter.

8.4. Recloser Wear

8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation
Maintenance of contact life of Recloser. Manages the contact life calculated from fault current
size when faults interrupted. The initial value is 100%
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR
[WEAR MONITOR (%)] User can confirm in
1.CONTACT A : 98.70
2.CONTACT B : 98.70 “MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”
3.CONTACT C : 98.70
Phase A Wear : Shows phase A contact life.
Phase B Wear : Shows phase B contact life.
Phase C Wear : Shows phase C contact life.
8.4.2. Related setting menu

1) Function Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Function
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range OFF, ALARM
>Function: ALARM
Pickup(%): 20.0 Default ALARM Step ~
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Select for system to operate when Recloser wear elements were picked
up.
2) Pickup Setting
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Pickup(%)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %
Function: ALARM
>Pickup(%): 20.0 Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Enter Pickup value of contact life.
3) Rated Voltage Setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Rated Volt(kV)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 15, 27, 38 ㎸
Function: ALARM
Pickup(%): 20.0 Default Note Step ~
>Rated Volt(kV): 15
Select rated voltage.
NOTE : The rated voltage determines the Recloser type.

4) Interrupter capacity setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / Interrupt(kA)
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 5.0 ~ 50.0 kA
Pickup(%): 20.0
Rated Volt(kV): 15 Default 16 Step 0.1 kA
>Interrupt(kA): 12.5
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
5) Maximum Rated Interruption Number Setting

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / No. Max I
[RECLOSER WEAR] Range 1 ~ 999
Rated Volt(kV): 15
Interrupt(kA): 12.5 Default 100 Step 1
>No. Max I: 100
Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.
6) Clear value Setting

Use to synchronize EVRC2A contact wear with Recloser contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / A Wear Set
>A Wear Set: 100.0
>B Wear Set: 100.0 Default 100.00 Step 0.01 %
>C Wear Set: 100.0
Enter a value of Phase A ’s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / B Wear Set

>A Wear Set: 100.0
>C Wear Set: 100.0
Enter a value of Phase B ’s contact wear.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / RECLOSER WARE / C Wear Set

>A Wear Set: 100.0
>C Wear Set: 100.0
Enter a value of Phase C ’s contact wear.

7) Stored value Clear

Select “8. WEAR MONITOR” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear value. Insert the value set in “PRIMARY SETTING /
MONITORING / RECLOSER WEAR / A, B, C Wear” from LCD menu.
8.5. Battery Test

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / BT Time(day)
[BATTERY TEST] Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 7 day
>BT Time(day): OFF
Default OFF Step 1 day
Select the period for automatically checking the battery status.

8.6. Fault Locator

The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the
phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to
ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and
fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance.
This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence
impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance.
In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error
due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault
current and voltage.
For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault
data is required at least 2 cycles.
If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily
achieved, but source impedance is not required.
Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power
flow.
In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful.
The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder.
Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 8-1. Faulted

distribution system circuit” for example.
mZ (1-m)Z
IA
IF L
O
VA
RF A
D
Figure 8-1. Faulted distribution system circuit
The calculated “Fault Location” can be checked on the “FAULT CYCLE” event menu. For more
details, refer to “12.1. Waveform Capture”.

The fault locator settings are as follows :

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Function
[FAULT LOCATOR] Range OFF, ON
>Function : OFF
Length(km) : 50.0 Default OFF Step ~
Z1(RES) : 10.0
If function = ON, the feature is operational.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Feeder Length

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 99.9 km
Function : OFF
>Length(km) : 50.0 Default 50.0 Step 0.1 km
Z1(RES) : 10.0
Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Resistive

[FAULT LOCATOR] Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0
Function : OFF
Length(km) : 50.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z1(RES) : 10.0
Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence
impedance, in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z1-Inductive

Length(km) : 50
Z1(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z1(IND) : 10.0
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Resistive

Z1(RES) : 10.0
Z1(IND) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z0(RES) : 10.0
Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance,
in actual ohms.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR \ Z0-Inductive

Z1(IND) : 10.0
Z0(RES) : 10.0 Default 10.0 Step 0.1
>Z0(IND) : 10.0
Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence

8.7. Gas Low Lock - Option

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / GAS LOW LOCK / Function
[GAS LOW LOCK] Range DISABLE,ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
Default DISABLE Step ~
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A can’t be opened or closed on the

gas pressure low status (below 0.1bar).
If function = DISABLE, EVRC2A can be opened or closed even if it
is on the gas pressure low status.
NOTE : This function is applies only to Gas Type Recloser.
8.8. EXT’ Trip & Lock - Option

This function can make EVRC2A opened and then close lock when the corresponding signal sent
from SCADA is received. And EVRC2A can be reset from close lock status by “FI Reset”
command.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / Function
[EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range DISABLE,ENABLE
>Function: DISABLE
>USE Inputport: 1 Default DISABLE Step ~
>Reset Method: LOCAL
If function = ENABLE, EVRC2A will be open and then close locked
when the signal from SCADA is received.
If function = DISABLE, the function is not activated even if the signal
is received.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock / USE Inputport

[EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range 1~8
>Function: DISABLE
>USE Inputport: 1 Default 1 Step 1
Set the port to receive the signal from SCADA.
As example, if “1” is set, this function is activated or not by the signal
value on IN01 port.

PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / EXT’ Trip & Lock \ Reset Method

[EXT’ Trip & Lock] Range 0:LOCAL,1:LO&RE
>Function: DISABLE
>USE Inputport: 1 Default LOCAL Step ~
LOCAL : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel, the close lock is
released.
LO&RE : By pushing [FI Reset] Key on the panel or remote “FI
Reset” command, the close lock is released.
8.9. Live Load Block – Option

When closed, EVRC2A provides the Close Block function operated by whether or not there is
voltage live line on the load side.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Function

[Live Load Blocking] Range OFF, RECLO, CLOSE, BOTH
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default OFF Step ~
>Time Delay: 1.00
If function = OFF, the function is not operational.
If function = RECLOSE, the function is operated when reclosed after
fault occurrence.
If function = CLOSE, the function is operated when manually closed
locally or remotely.
If function = BOTH, the function is operated when reclosed or
manually closed.
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Pickup(xVT)

[Live Load Blocking] Range 0.10 ~ 0.90
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default 0.30 Step 0.01
>Time Delay: 1.00
Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage in
load side. As example, if secondary voltage of load side is 100V and a
user wants that the close lock is operated when the voltage of load side
is over 30V, set 0.3090.30x100V = 30V)
PRIMARY SETTING / MONITORING / Live Load Blocking / Time Delay

[Live Load Blocking] Range 0.00~600.00sec
>Function: OFF
>Pickup(xVT): 0.30 Default 1.00sec Step 0.01
>Time Delay: 1.00
At open, if the voltage on load side is over the Pickup setting and
maintained for this setting time, the close block is operated.

9. STATUS
This menu shows the current status of EVRC2A like below
y OPTO INPUTS
y RELAY OUTPUTS
y CLOCK
y CONTROL TYPE
9.1. OPTO Inputs

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OPTO INPUTS” to see external input port status..
[OPTO INPUTS] Display 8 input port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Input 1: OPEN
Input 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the input signal status.
Input 3: OPEN
Input 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Input is de-asserted,
Input 5: OPEN
Input 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Input is asserted.
Input 7: OPEN
Input 8: CLOSE
Door St: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all input port statuses
9.2. Relay Outputs

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RELAY OUTPUTS” to see external output port status.
[RELAY OUTPUTS] Display 8 output port statuses. They are indicated as “OPEN” or
Output 1: OPEN
Output 2: CLOSE “CLOSE” depending on the output signal status.
Output 3: OPEN
Output 4: OPEN OPEN : Shows External Output is de-asserted,
Output 5: OPEN
Output 6: OPEN CLOSE : Shows External Output is asserted.
Output 7: OPEN
Output 8: CLOSE
Use [▲] [▼] button to see all output port statuses

9.3. Clock
Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CLOCK” to see current time.
The “CLOCK” menu screen can vary according to the EVRC2A version.
Prior to Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]
2009/11/05 21:02:38
From Ver 6.15 of EVRC2A
STATUS / CLOCK
Check current time
[CURRENT TIME]
ⓐ Indicates the local time type’s present time.
L2009/01/01 09:00:00
G2009/01/01 00:00:00 ⓑ Indicates the GMT time type’s present time.
[CURRENT TIME]
L ⓐ
G ⓑ

9.4. Control Type

Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / CONTROL TYPE” to see EVRC2A information.
STATUS / CONTROL TYPE
Preset EVRC2A in information is displayed.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx- EVRC2A information screen consists of 2 screens, first screen shows
5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXX
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060 firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is
changed by [▲] [▼] button.
[CONTROL TYPE]
EVRC2A-Mn-xxxxxxx-
5xxSLLHP-xXN13DxXⓐ
03-9707-FBFB-xx-6060 NOTE
The letter located at `ⓐ’ in the “CONTROL TYPE” screen on the
side indicates whether ZCT is installed or not.
[CONTROL TYPE]
If the letter located at `ⓐ’ is `X’ then it is a product that was
MPU: 7.00 DSP: 1.00

dispatched without ZCT installed(normal mode) while, if the
CPU: 2.00
letter located at `ⓐ’ is `S’ then it is a product that was dispatched
with ZCT installed(special option) as per user’s request.
Depending on whether the product was dispatched with ZCT
installed or not, the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the “PICKUP
CURRENT” menu and the setting range of the “S.E.F” in the
“CLPU-TYPE1” menu will be different.

10. METERING
The following values are contained in the metering elements of EVRC2A.
y Current
y Voltage(Source Side, Load Side)
y Frequency
y Synchronism Voltage
y Power
y Energy
y Demand
y System
y Harmonics
y Unbalance
NOTE : Unbalance is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.

10.1. Metering Elements

10.1.1. Current
The following values are contained in the current metering.
IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
IG : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
ISG : Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, Lag)
I2 : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS current (A)
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT
[LINE CURRENT(A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]

A: 0 B: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
C: 0 G: 0 [PHASE B CURRENT] [GROUND CURRENT]
SG: 0 I2: 0 0 A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
[ZERO SEQ CURRENT] [POS SEQ CURRENT] [SENSTV CURRENT]

0A 0.0 Lag 0A 0.0 Lag 0 A 0.0 Lag
[NEQ SEQ CURRENT]
0A 0.0 Lag
Display measured values of current and current phase per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check
metering information of current.

10.1.2. Voltage(Souce Side, Load Side)

The following values are contained in the voltage metering.
A-N : Displays the measured A-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
B-N : Displays the measured B-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
C-N : Displays the measured C-N RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
A-B : Displays the measured A-B RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
B-C : Displays the measured B-C RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
C-A : Displays the measured C-A RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
AVERAGE PHASE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS phase voltage(㎸)
AVERAGE LINE : Displays the calculated average of the RMS line voltage(㎸)
POS SEQ : Displays the calculated positive sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
NEG SEQ : Displays the calculated negative sequence RMS voltage and phasor(㎸, Lag)
ZERO SEQ : Displays the calculated zero sequence RMS voltage and phasor (㎸, Lag)
You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / S-VOLTAGE or L-VOLTAGE
[VOLTAGE (kV)] [AVERAGE PHASE] [PHASE A-N VOLTAGE]

AN: 0.00 AB: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
BN: 0.00 BC: 0.00 [AVERAGE LINE] [PHASE B-N VOLTAGE]
CN: 0.00 CA: 0.00 VOLTAGE --> 0.00 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[PHASE C-N VOLTAGE]

0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[LINE A-B VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE] [POS SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE B-C VOLTAGE]

0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
[NEG SEQ VOLTAGE] [LINE C-A VOLTAGE]
0.00 kV 0.0 Lag 0.00 kV 0.0 Lag
Display measured values of voltage and voltage phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering
information of voltage.

10.1.3. Frequency
The following values are contained in the frequency metering.
y Frequency(㎐)
y Frequency decay rate(㎐/Sec)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY
[FREQUENCY (Hz)]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz/Sec Frequency Display
10.1.4. Synchro Voltage

The following values are contained in the synchronism voltage metering.
y Synchro Voltage(㎸)
y Synchro Phasor(deg°)
y Synchro Frequency(㎐)
y Synchrocheck delta(Phasor, voltage, frequency)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYNCHRO VOLTAGE
Display measured values of Synchronism Voltage, Frequency and
[SYNCHRO VOLTAGE]
R:15.59 kV 0.0 Lag Synchronism Delta. Use [▲] [▼] button to check metering information
S:15.59 kV 120.0 Lag
T:15.59 kV 240.0 Lag of Synchronism voltage.
NOTE : The “SYNCHRO VOLTAGE” menu screen can vary

[SYNCHRO FREQUENCY]
50.00 Hz according to the EVRC2A version.
[SYNCHRO DELTA]
A: 0.09 kV 0.0 Deg
B:15.59 kV 59.9 Deg
C:15.59 kV 359.9 Deg
[SYNCHRO DELTA]
50.00 Hz

10.1.5. Power
The following values are contained in the power metering.
y Real power(MW)
y Reactive power(Mvar)
y Apparent power(MVA)
y Power factor(%)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER
[REAL POWER (MW)] [REACTIVE POW(MVAR)] [APPARENT POW(MWA)]

Pa: 0.00 Pa: 0.00 Pa: 0.00
Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00 Pb: 0.00 P3: 0.00
Pc: 0.00 Pc: 0.00 Pc: 0.00
[POWER FACTOR]
Pa: 0.0
Pb: 0.0 P3: 0.0
Pc: 0.0
Display measured values of power and power factor per phase. Use [▲] [▼] button to check
metering information of power.
10.1.6. Energy
The following values are contained in the energy metering.
y Positive watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y Negative watthour(MWh) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y Positive varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
y negative varhour(Mvar) & start date (Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
The updated rate of the energy meters is based on the “Time Constant” setting “MAIN MENU /
SETTING / MONITORING / DEMAND” The meters will update every 1/15 of the Demand
Constant. For example : if the Demand Constant is set to 15 minutes, the energy meters will
update every 1 minute (15min × 1/15 = 1 min)
The watt-hour and VAR-hour meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY
SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA / ENERGY”. The “SD(start date)” on LCD indicates the
time when the watt-hour and VAR-hour meters are reset.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY
[POSITIVE W/H(MWh)] [POSITIVE V/H(MVar)] [NEGATIVE W/H(MWh)]

Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0 Pa: 0 Pb: 0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00 SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
[NEGATIVE V/H(MVar)]
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
Pa: 0 Pb: 0
SD:09/12/31 00:00:00
Display energy. Use [▲] [▼] button to check energy information.
10.1.7. Demand
The following values are contained in the demand metering.
Actual demand & maximum demand with Value (Current, Real power, Reactive power) and Date
(Year/Month/Date Hour:Minute,Second)
During each demand value, the EVRC2A also captures and stores maximum values for the
measurements listed below. It functions as a standard maximum meter. When a new maximum
value is determined, the old value is replaced. A time stamp in the following format (Date:
Year/Month/Day and Time: Hour:Minute,Second), is placed with the latest maximum values.
The Max demand meters can be reset to 0 through “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP /
CLEAR SAVED DATA / MAX DEMAND”

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / DEMEND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND
[DEMAND CURRENT (A)] [PHASE A CURRENT] [PHASE B CURRENT]

A: 0 B: 0 DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A
C: 0 G: 0 MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
SG: 0 I2: 0 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE SG CURRENT] [PHASE G CURRENT] [PHASE C CURRENT]

DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0 A
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A MAX : 0 A
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00
[PHASE I2 CURRENT] [PHASE A REAL POWER] [PHASE B REAL POWER]

DEMAND: 0 A DEMAND: 0.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0 A MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-A REACTIVE POWER] [3P REAL POWER (MW)] [PHASE C REAL POWER]
DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MW DEMAND: 0.00 MW
MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MW MAX : 0.00 MW
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00
[P-B REACTIVE POWER] [P-C REACTIVE POWER] [3P REACTIVE POWER]

DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar DEMAND: 0.00 MWar
MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar MAX : 0.00 MWar
10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00 10/01/01 00:00:00
Demand Current, Real power and Reactive power Display.

Use [▲] [▼] keys to move to next value.

10.1.8. System
The following values are contained in the system metering.
y Board power(±12, +5V)
y Temperature(℃)
y Battery voltage(V)
y Gas pressure(Bar)
NOTE : According to recloser type, there may be no gas pressure measurement.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / SYSTEM”

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM
[ SYSTEM METER] System metering display.
+12:12.35 –12:-12.38
+5 : 5.12 TMP:27.58
BAT:27.44 GAS: 0.00
10.1.9. Unbalance
The following values are contained in the unbalance metering.
y Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Source Side
y Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) – Load Side
y Current unbalance(I2/I1)
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / SYSTEM
[UNBALANCE- %] Unbalance metering display.
SOURCE-VOLT: 0
LOAD-VOLT: 0
CURRENT: 0
NOTE : This menu is supported from version 6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.

10.1.10. Harmonics
The following values are contained in harmonics metering.
y 1st~7th Harmonic of Current
y 1st~7th Harmonic of Voltage
y THD of Current
y THD of Voltage
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS”

MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS
[HARMONICS] Current and Voltage Harmonics display.
>1.THD
>2.Current-A
>3.Current-B
>4.Current-C
>5.Voltage-A
>6.Voltage-B
>7.Voltage-C
THD
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD”.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / THD
[Total Har’ Dis’(%)] This menu is to display the total harmonic distortion of current and
>Ia : 0 Va : 0
>Ib : 0 Vb : 0 voltage.
>Ic : 0 Vc : 0
Current-A
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A”.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A
This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic of current through phase
A.

Current-B(C)
The same Menu as “Current-A” function.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-B(C)”.
Voltage-A
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-A”.
MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS / Current-A
This menu is to display the 1st~7th harmonic and THD of voltage in
phase A.
Voltage -B(C)
The same Menu as “Voltage-A” function.
You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / HARMONICS / Voltage-B(C)”.

10.2. Accuracy
The harmonic components of current and voltage are removed from the input voltage and current
parameters, so all measurements based on these quantities respond to the fundamental
components only.

Phase A RMS Current
Phase B RMS Current
CURRENT Phase C RMS Current A ±1% of 2×CT 20×CT

Phase G RMS Current
Phase SEF RMS Current
A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage
B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage
C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage

VOLTAGE ㎸ ±1% –
R–N (R–S) RMS Voltage
S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage*
T–N (T–R) RMS Voltage*
SYMMETRICAL I1, I2, 3I0 A ±1% of 2×CT

–
COMPONENTS V1, V2, 3V0 ㎸ ±1%
Phase A, B, C
POWER FACTOR Rate ±0.02 –1.000 to 1.000
3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
3ΦREAL POWER MW ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
3Φ Phase
3ΦREACTIVE Phase A, B, C
MVar ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
POWER 3Φ Phase
3ΦAPPARENT Phase A, B, C
MVA ±2% –32.000 to 32.000
POWER 3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
WATT-HOURS MWH ±2% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase
Phase A, B, C
VAR-HOURS MVarH ±2% –32000 to 32000
3Φ Phase
Phase A/B/C/RG Current A ±2%
DEMAND A/B/C, 3Φ Real Power MW ±2% –
A/B/C, 3Φ Reactive Power MVar ±2%


A-N (A-B) Source Voltage

FREQUENCY ㎐ ±0.02 40.00~70.00
R-N (R-S) Load Voltage
1st~7th Harmonic of Current ±1% 0% to 100%

st th
1 ~7 Harmonic of Voltage ±1% 0% to 100%
HARMONICS –
THD of Current ±3% 0% to 100%
THD of Voltage ±3% 0% to 100%
Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in source side ±2% 0% to 999%
UNBALANCE Voltage unbalance(V2/V1) in load side % ±2% 0% to 999%
Current unbalance(I2/I1) ±2% 0% to 999%
If the VT connection type is set to delta, all single phase voltage quantities are displayed as zero.

11. MAINTENANCE
EVRC2A has maintenance function for following items.
y COUNTERS
y WEAR MONITOR
y OUTPUT RELAY TEST
y POWER QUALITY - Option
11.1. Counters
EVRC2A records counter related with system operation. The recorded counter items are below.
In order to check counter information, go to “MAINTENANCE / COUNTERS”. For more detail
information, refer to “8.3.1. Trip Counter Explanation”.
y Trip
y Fault
y System Restart
11.2. Wear Monitor

EVRC2A displays the each phase’s contact wear of the recloser. In order to check information of
the recloser’s contact wear, go to “MAINTENANCE / WEAR MONITOR”, For more detail
information, refer to “8.4.1. Recloser Wear Explanation”.

11.3. Output Relay Test

EVRC2A is capable to perform the output test of the relay output ports(1~8). For the output test,
go to “MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST” menu.
MAINTENANCE / OUTPUT RELAY TEST
① Select output signal at ① for testing.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST] Press [ENT] button and then ② is shown.
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press [FUN] button at ② and then ③ is shown. The output signal has
② been “asserted” for 2 sec. If the test is completed, the message, “END
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST] TESTING”, is shown and then back to the previous menu.
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
Press <ESC> : Cancel
If the [ESC] button is press at ②, ④ is shown and the output test is
③ canceled.
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TESTING
④
[OUTPUT RELAY TEST]
SELECT RELAY :RLY 1
Press <FUN> : Start
TEST Canceled

11.4. Power Quality - Option

11.4.1. Power Quality Explanation
EVRC2A records the related number of times and duration when the outage or
sag/swell/unbalance occurs. Especially Supply Outage and Power Quality counter are operated
depending on power quality function set in “SYSTEM SETUP” menu. User can confirm in
“MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/POWER QUALITY”.
MAIN MENU / MAINTENANCE / POWER QUALITY

[SUPPLY OUTAGE] ① It indicates the time of outage on a power source side. The time of
T-Time T-Cnt
S: ① ② outage is displayed as hour/minute/second.
L: ③ ④
② It indicates the number of times of outage on a power source side.
[SUPPLY OUTAGE] ③ It indicates the time of outage on a load side. The time of outage is
T-Time T-Cnt
S: 0000/00/00 0000 displayed as hour/minute/second.
L: 0000/00/00 0000
④ It indicates the number of outage on a load side.
[PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL ⑤⑥⑦ They indicate the numbers of sag on A,B,C phase.
A Phase: ⑤ ⑧
B Phase: ⑥ ⑨ ⑧⑨⑩ They indicate the numbers of swell on A,B,C phase.
C Phase: ⑦ ⑩
⑪ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a source side.
[PQ COUNT] SAG SWELL ⑫ It indicates the number of voltage unbalance on a load side.
A Phase: 31012 31003
B Phase: 31011 31002 ⑬ It indicates the number of current unbalance.
C Phase: 31029 31023
[PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE NOTE : The number of times and the hour do not increase
SOURCE-VOLT : ⑪
LOAD-VOLT : ⑫ during the outage if the power of EVRC2A is off. The
CURRENT : ⑬
number of times and the hour of outage will be recorded
[PQ COUNT] UNBALANCE by the end of outage.
SOURCE-VOLT : 000
LOAD-VOLT : 000
CURRENT : 000
NOTE : These counter for unbalance are supported from version
6.12 of EVRC2A-N6,NT.


1) Function Setting
For more details, please refer to “6.10 Power Quality-Option”.

Select “10. P-Quality Count” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear the Supply Outage Counter and Power Quality Counter.

12. EVENT RECORDER

EVRC2A has recording function for following items.
y FAULT CYCLE WAVEFORM CAPTURE
y SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER
y LOAD PROFILE
y DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER
y FAULT TRIP - Option
y POWER QUALITY - Option
12.1. Waveform Capture

In case of Fault, Waveform Capture records 32 Data of 15-Cycle with 16-Smple per 1 Cycle
resolution.
Fault cycle summary is displayed on LCD screen
Captured fault waveforms can be showed by the interface software.

MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE

Ⓐ Move to ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT CYCLE” to
[NO-①] ② see Fault cycle summary
IA: ③ IB: ③
IC: ③ IG: ③ y To see previous value, press [▲] key.
④10/01/01 19:51:58
y To see next value, press [▼] key.
Ⓑ On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ, Ⓑ screen in term.
[NO-①] Locate: --⑤
IS: ③
IQ: ③ ① Fault No: There are 32 events are recorded and the latest event is
④10/01/01 19:51:58
displayed in advance.
Ex> ② Fault Type

- Fault Pickup
[NO-01] Fault Pickup
IA: 0 IB: 0 - 27: Under Voltage Trip
IC: 0 IG: 0
10/01/01 19:51:58 - 59: Over Voltage Trip
- 81: Under Frequency Trip
- A, B, C, G: Fault phase shows LED ON.
[NO-01] Locate: --- - S: Sensitive Earth Fault
IS: 0
IQ: 0 - Q: Negative Sequence Fault
10/01/01 19:51:58
- O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
③ Each phase fault current unit : Ampere(A)
④ Event occurred time

: Year/Month/Day(or Month/Day/Year) Hour: Minute: Second
⑤ Fault Location
Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ON.
For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to
“8.6. Fault Locator”.

12.1.1. Trigger Source

y Occurred Protection element pickup
y Occurred Fault trip command active
Depending on pickup size, if interval between pickup and trip is within 15 cycles including
prefault cycles(4 cycles), then record pickup cycles. But if the interval between pickup and trip
are not within 15 cycles, then record pickup cycles and trip cycles. These operations are very
useful to examine.
12.1.2. Data Channels

Stores following data :
y 5 currents : Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Isef
y 3 voltages (Va, Vb, Vc) : not passed digital-filter
y 85 logic input states
y 8Ch output relays
y 8Ch Inputs
12.1.3. Sample Rate

Captures one period of 16 sampling per cycle.
12.1.4. Storage capacity

The capacity of storage is last 32 events of 15cycles.

1) ON/OFF Setting
Fault Cycle waveform capture function can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Fault Cycle
[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
>Fault Cycle: ON
Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
Load Profile: ON
ON : Record fault cycle waveform.
OFF : No record of fault cycle waveform.

2) Pre-fault length Setting

User sets the length of pre-fault before Trigger.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP \ EVENT RECORDER \ Len' of Pre F
[EVENT RECORDER] Range 0 ~ 14
Fault Cycle: ON
>Len' of Pre F: 4 Default 4 Step 1
Load Profile: ON
Usually sets 4 cycles as default.

Select “1. FAULT CYCLE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / REALY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear the stored value.
12.1.6. Interface software

Interface software shows Data and captured waveform (below)
Figure 12-1. Data and captured waveform showed by Interface Software

12.2. System Event Recorder

Record changes of system status up to 2048 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS
[NO-0001] SLEEP MODE Confirm in
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / SYSTEM STATUS”
TIME : 19:51:58:387

y Protection Element
y 52A Contact
y Sequence status
y Front panel control
y AC supply
y External control
y Fail operation
y External input status
y System alarm etc.
y V1(Source), V2(Load)
y Power Quality detect
NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix C. EVENT TEXT &
DESCRIPTION”.
12.2.2. Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.
12.2.3. Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)
12.2.4. Storage Capacity

Stores last 2048 events.

System automatically maintains system event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select “2.SYSTEM STATUS” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear.


Interface software shows system status events.
Figure 12-2. System Status Events showed by Interface Software

12.3. Load Profile

Record the Demand value when reaches in setting time (5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60minute). Load
profile has 5120 Banks that can store values of 213 days if setting time is 60minute.
LOAD PROFILE
①
CURRENT (A) [0001] Confirm in
A: 0 B: 0
C: 0 G: 0 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / LOAD PROFILE”
10/01/22 21:45:00
y To see previous value, press [▲] key.
② y To see next value, press [▼] key.
REAL POW(MW) [0001] y On screen ①, use [◀] or [▶] key to see ①, ②, ③, ④ screen in
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0 3P: 0 term.
10/01/22 21:45:00
③
REAC POW(Mvar)[0001]
A : 0 B : 0
C : 0 3P: 0
10/01/22 21:45:00
④
PF&ENERGY-3P [0001]
P-F(%) : 0.0
MWh: 0.0 MVh: 0.0
10/01/22 21:45:00

y Demand Current(A, B, C, G)
y Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
y Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)
y Demand Power Factor( 3ф)
y Demand Energy - Positive Watthour(3ф), Positive Varhour(3ф)

y 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 Minute

y Stores 5120 events


1) ON/OFF Setting
Load Profile can be set ON/OFF by user.
PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / Load Profile
[EVENT RECORDER] Range OFF, ON
Fault Cycle: ON
Len' of Pre F: 4 Default ON Step ~
>Load Profile: ON
ON : Records load profile.
OFF : No record of load profile.
2) Recording time interval setting

PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / EVENT RECORDER / L.P save time(m)
[EVENT RECORDER] Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min
Len' of Pre F: 4
Load Profile: ON Default 15 Step ~
>L.P save time(m):15
Sets the interval time between Records.
12.3.5. Stored value Clear

Select “3. LOAD PROFILE” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear.


Interface software shows load profile data.
Figure 12-3. Load Profile Data showed by Interface Software

12.4. Diagnostic Event Recorder

Record diagnostic events up to 512 lists when trigger source asserted and deasserted.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC
[NO-001] GAS HIGH Confirm in
STATUS : LO/DEASSERT
DATE : 10/01/22 ”MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / DIAGNOSTIC”
TIME : 19:51:58:387

y SYSTEM POWER : AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V
y A/D Conversion : A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2
y POWER DOWN MODE
y GAS STATUS etc
※. NOTE ) According to a recloser type, there may be no diagnosis of gas pressure status.
y
NOTE : For more details about Trigger Source, refer to “Appendix C. EVENT TEXT &
DESCRIPTION”.

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 1/4 cycle
12.4.3. Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)


System automatically maintains Diagnostic event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select “4.DIAGNOSTIC” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED
DATA” to clear.


Interface software shows Diagnostic events.
Figure 12-4. Diagnostic Events showed by Interface Software

12.5. Fault Trip Event Recorder - Option

When fault trip occurs, fault time and fault current of each phase are recorded.
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP
Ⓐ Confirm in “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / FAULT TRIP”.
[①/②] ③ y To see previous value, press [▲] key.
IA: ④ IB: ④
IC: ④ IG: ④ y To see next value, press [▼] key.
⑤10/01/01 00:00:00
On screen Ⓐ use [◀] or [▶] key to see Ⓐ, Ⓑ screen in term.
Ⓑ
[①/②] ③ ① Display the order of the fault trip occurrence and events from the
IS: ④
IQ: ④ most recent fault to the oldest fault.
⑤10/01/01 00:00:00
Total 512 events can be stored.
② Display fault sequence(shot counter).
Ex> ③ Display fault type.
[001/1] ABCG ④ Display current of each phase when fault occurs.
IA: 0 IB: 0
IC: 0 IG: 0 ⑤ Display fault time.
10/01/01 00:00:00
[001/1] ABCG
IS: 0
IQ: 0
10/01/01 00:00:00

y Target elements
- A: A Phase Overcurrent Trip
- B: B phase Overcurrent Trip
- C: C phase Overcurrent Trip
- G: G phase Overcurrent Trip
- S: Sensitive Earth Overcurrent Trip
- Q: Negative Sequence Overcurrent Trip
- 27: Under Voltage Trip
- 59: Over Voltage Trip
- 81: Under Frequency Trip
- O: Other Trip(Demand Current Trip, Loss of Phase etc.)
y fault current[A]: A , B, C and G phase currents, SEF current, Negative Sequence current




System automatically maintains fault trip event recorder. User can clear only stored events.
Select “9. Fault Trip” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR SAVED DATA”
to clear.

Interface software shows Fault Trip events.
Figure 12-5. Fault Trip Events showed by Interface Software

12.6. Power Quality Event Recorder - Option

EVRC2A always monitors the voltage on both power source side and load side, and records the
data of power outage in order to analyze the cause when the outage is detected on either side.
When the outage is detected, EVRC2A records the outage time and duration. Besides, it also
records the occurrence time of sag/swell event and unbalance event.
Power Quality event can be viewed at “MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER
QUALITY”
MAIN MENU / EVENT RECORDER / POWER QUALITY
① Displays the order of the event occurrence and events from the
most recent event to the oldest event.
Total 512 events can be stored.
[NO-001] OUTAGE-S ② Displays the event type and detect value.
OT: 0000 h 00 m 00 s
DATE : 10/01/01 - OUTAGE-S : power supply side outage
TIME : 00:00:00:000
- OUTAGE-L : load side outage
[NO-①] ② - SAG-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase sag.
OT: ③
DATE : ④ - SWL-A(B,C) : A(B,C) phase swell.
TIME : ⑤
- UBL-SV : Voltage Unbalance on source side
- UBL-LV : Voltage Unbalance on load side
- UBC : Current Unbalance
③ Displays the duration of outage as in hour/ minute/second and
cycle message added after duration.
④ Displays the time of outage, sag, swell or unbalance detected.
NOTE : It does not record outage or sag/swell event if the power

of EVRC2A was off during the outage.


y Target elements
- Source Outage
- Load Outage
- Sag/Swell
- Voltage Unbalance
- Current Unbalance
y Monitoring elements
- Source side Voltage
- Load side Voltage
- Current



1) Function and Outage duration Settings
Refer to menu, “11.4.2 Related Setting Menu.”

System automatically maintains power quality event recorder. User can clear only stored
events. Select “11. P-Quality Event” in “PRIMARY SETTING / RELAY SETUP / CLEAR
SAVED DATA” to clear.

All the supply outage events can be viewed at interface software.

Figure 12-6. Power Quality Events showed by Interface Software

13. INSTALLATION
13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch
User Interface Door

User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull
the handle.
Control Power Switch
After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power,
right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.
AC Power Outlet
For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for
safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. Inner Structure”

13.2. Vent and Outer Cover
Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover
Outer Cover
It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle.
The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.
Air Vent
To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side
covered with Outer Cover.

13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan
y EVRC2A has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type.
y Small size is available for EVR1, EVR2, Large size is available for EVR3.
y Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger, the space unit is referred to
“Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”

y Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.
y EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5㎸) / EVR2 (27㎸) / EVR3 (38㎸)
y For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.
y Weight of EVRC2A small size is 85㎏ and large size is 90㎏.
y EVRC2A should be fixed top and bottom with 16㎜(5/8") Bolt.
y There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning
hardware.
y The diameter of the hole is 22㎜(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series
can be extended.

13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram
y After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.

y Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12㎜(0.470") diameter.
y Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from EVRC2A Earth Terminal must be connected to the
ground.

13.5. Inner Structure
Figure 13-5. Inner Structure
Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker)

Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac(or 110Vac – option).
Heater
Optional Heater is 40W
Battery
Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement.
Fuse
TF1, TF2, TF3 are for circuit protection, refers to (see “13.20. Fuse”)
Terminal Block
Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.
User Available Space
Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6.
Mount Accessories Dimensions”.

13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions
y Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.
y On Base plate, 10㎜/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate.
y Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6㎜ (4”) to 177.8㎜ (7”)

13.7. User-Available DC Power

Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power
Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions
24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 40W Continuous Side Panel CN5
15Vdc 14.0∼15.5Vdc 60W 60second (1-VCC/+)
12Vdc 11.0∼12.5Vdc Short 1second (2-AGND/-)
Standard Voltage : 12Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating
y 30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power
should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is
referred to “Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses”
y Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) CN5
connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.
y To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3 “Figure 13-31. ANALOG
BOARD”, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the
voltage rating due to disassembly.
y When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there
is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.

13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses
Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses
y Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block.

y Standard AC Power is 220Vac(Optional AC Power is 110Vac).
y AC Power input terminal 1, 2 are connected from Receptacle to Terminal block. Terminal 3
is the ground.
y Terminal 4, 5 are for connecting additional AC Power. Terminal 4 is connected with TF3 for
protection, terminal 5 is in series with AC Power
y On TF3 Fuse, AC Power Outlet is connected with 40W Heater. Reference for branching.
y In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire,
green wired line is for the ground.
y Terminal 6, 7, 8 are spare for Recloser 52 contact.
y Terminal 9, 10 are for User Available Terminal block. In need of more terminals, use User
Available Space.
52 Contact Auxiliary Specs

Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A

13.9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram – VD Type
Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type
y Wiring diagram of EVRC2A standard.

y CN1 has different system wirings depending on User system. In “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A
Wiring Diagram - VD Type”, CN1 is marked as Earthing System. For non-Earthing system,
refer to “Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram”
y CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. “Figure 13-8. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VD Type” is
VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) type and
“Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type” is VT type.
y VT type is standard and VD type is for optional. VD type and VT type are not exchangeable.

13.10. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type
Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type
y “Figure 13-9. EVRC2A Wiring Diagram - VT Type” is wiring diagram of VT type of which
Voltage Input is optional.
y CN2 is Voltage Input Connector. For wiring, refer to “Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram”
y VD type and VT type are not exchangeable. VT type is standard and VD type is optional.

13.11. Side Panel

Current Inputs
IA,IB,IC,IN,SEF
CN2 Voltage Inputs
VA,VB,VC, VR,VS, VT
CN3 AC24V IN
Relay Module AC Power Input
CN4 BATT` IN
Relay Module DC Power Input
CN5 POWER OUT - Option
User-Available DC Voltage Source
CN6 CONTROL
Recloser Open, Close
CN7 UPS
Monitors and controls Close and Trip Power
CN8 RECLOSER STATUS
Open, Close, Lock, Pressure
CN9 CN10 OUTPUTS and INPUTS - Option
OUT1~OUT5(A Contact), OUT6~OUT7(B Contact)
OUT8(ALARM)
IN01~IN08
PORT2 - Option
SERIAL RS232
PORT3 - Option
SERIAL RS485/422
PORT4 - Option
ETHERNET
NOTE :
1) I/O Terminal (CN10, CN9) has functions to
control basic operation of Recloser and can be
connected with SCADA System for use.
2) Remove the coating of cable length of 8㎜
(0.315"). Side panel connector for user should be
connected to Wire size AWG24 to 12 Figure 13-10. Side Panel

13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel
IG(A07,A08) in Earthing System.
SEF(A09,A10) should be connected, so
called “JUMPER”
IG Input Current Range

y 0.5A Nominal
y 2A continuous
y 25A 1 second
y Burden : 0.19VA(0.5A)
Current IG should be connected with

SEF(A09,A10) of Side Panel in.
Non Earthing System.
IG(A07,A08) should be connected to each
other.
SEF Input Current Range

y 0.05A Nominal
y 0.16A Continuous
y 0.6A 1 second
y Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A) Figure 13-11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram
Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation”
CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

13.13. VD Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-12. VD Wiring Diagram
y VD(CVD(Capacitor Voltage Divider) or RVD(Resistance Voltage Divider)) measures

Voltage with using Capacitor or Resistance installed in each Bushing of Recloser.
y VD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable.
y Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase
rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.
y Option CVD 15㎸, 27㎸, 38㎸ Class
y Option RVD 15㎸, 27㎸ Class

13.14. VT Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-13. VT Wiring Diagram
y VD(CVD or RVD) Type can not be used when VT(Voltage Transformer) Type was selected.
y VT wiring should match Current Inputs.
y Voltage Inputs VA, VB, VC, VR, VS, VT
Input Voltage Range : Vphase-Vcom Continuous < 300V
Burden : 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)

13.15. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation
Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation
y For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same.
y “Figure 13-14. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and
Recloser.
y If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and VD(CVD
or RVD) wiring in side panel to be matched.
y EVR Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.

13.16. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function Pin Function
A C.T Phase C a 52 common(Auxiliary)
B C.T Phase B b 52b(Auxiliary)
C C.T Phase A c 52a(Auxiliary)
D C.T Common(G) d Close and Trip Coil Common
E VD Source Phase C e Close and Trip Coil Common
F VD Source Phase B f Close and Trip Coil Common
G VD Source Phase A g Close Coil
H VD Load side Phase T h Close Coil
J VD Load side Phase S j Close Coil
K VD Load side Phase R k not connected
L Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) m Trip Coil
M not connected n not connected
N Pressure Sensor Power AGND p Trip Coil
P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc r Trip Coil
R Cable shield and Ground s not connected
S not connected
T Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect)
U Recloser Status Common(24Vdc)
V Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip)
W Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close)
X not connected
Z not connected
y Control EVRC2A Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female)

y Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male)
y Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”)
y Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”

Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle
“Figure 13-15. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control EVRC2A.

13.17. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

y Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling.
y For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.
Following notices are suggested.
Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing.
Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this
to complete connection.
Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control
Cable assembling
Figure 13-16. Recloser Receptacle Figure 13-17. Control Cable
13.18. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions
Pin Function
A AC Power Input
B AC Power Input (Neutral)
C not connected
Standard Input Voltage of Control EVRC2A is

220Vac(110Vac – option). Figure 13-18. Power Receptacle

13.19. AC Power Cable

TYPE : MS22-2S(Female)
Cable Length : 2C-3.5㎟ 6meter(236")
A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase)
B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral)
C PIN : not connected
13.20. Fuses
Table 13-4. Fuses
Rating /
Positions Dimensions Purpose
External AC - Power Input
7A/220Vac 0.25×1.25" Input Line of Transformer in UPS

Terminal Block TF1
15A/110Vac (6.385×31.75)㎜ Module AC Power
3A/220Vac 0.25"×1.25" Input Line of Transformer in

Terminal Block TF2
6A/110Vac (6.385×31.75)㎜ Control EVRC2A AC Power.
0.25"×1.25" AC Power outlet and Heater

Terminal Block TF3 10A
(6.385×31.75)㎜ User Available AC Power
Inside Relay Module F1 0.197"×0.787"

1A Trip Control
(Analog board) (5×20)㎜

1A Close Control

2A Relay Module Power

5A User-Available DC Power

13.21. Battery and Control run time

Table 13-5. Battery Specs
Nominal capacity 24V/17A (12V×2pcs)
Service life Time 5 years
Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R
Controller run time 40hours
Recharge Time SOC: ~80%/ 15hours
NOTE : Battery capacity can be changed by request of a user.
y Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series.

y Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to
battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time,
turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.
y The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per

month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of
+20℃(+68℉). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient

temperature.
y The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an

battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-20. Open Figure 13-19. Battery
Circuit Voltage”
y Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove

Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery
voltage.
If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is
0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.
y 24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through

NFB1(Battery Switch).
Relay Module supplies through CN4 Connector in Side Panel and
UPS Module supplies through P2 Connector of UPS Module. Figure 13-20. Open Circuit Voltage

13.22. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to
prevent over-recharge.
Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has.
Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power
switch) before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10Ω in series with
CD Ammeter.
Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V)

Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc)
NOTE : The battery charger is fully temperature compensated.

Battery charger capacity can be changed by request of a user.
13.23. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and
is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver.
For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and
black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake.
For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire
later. Reference “Figure 13-19. Battery”
13.24. Battery Protection

Battery protection is to protect the battery from over-discharge by disconnecting the battery from
the control circuit when AC power is lost and before the battery is completely discharged. CPU
measures the battery voltage and when the battery is below 21 volts, timer is operated and after
10 minutes, Latch Relay is set to disconnect the battery circuit.
On Power Down status, if the external power is re-supplied or the Power Switch is changed from
OFF to ON, Control Module is operated as normal.
When AC Power is not supplied, in order to operate it by Power Switch, OFF for 5 seconds and
turn it ON. When it is turned ON without Battery, it is Power downed after 10 minutes.

13.25. Communications
1) RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Table 13-6. RS232 Pin Functions for Port1 and Port2
Pin Serial Port1 Serial Port2 Definition
1 N/C DCD Data Carrier Detect
2 RXD RXD Receive Data
3 TXD TXD Transmit Data
4 N/C DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND GND Ground
6 N/C DSR Data Set Ready
7 N/C RTS Request To Send
8 N/C CTS Clear To Send
9 N/C N/C No Connection
Positions User Interface Panel(Male) Side Panel (Male)
Cable CC201 CC201,202,203
Purposes Maintenance DNP

Figure 13-21. RS232 Port
2) RS232/485 Pin Functions for Port3
Figure 13-22. Port 3

Table 13-7. PORT3(RS-232/RS485) Pin Description

Pin(RS-232) Signal Description Pin(RS-485) Description
1 DCD Data Carrier Detect 1 RS485+
2 RXD Receive Data(IN) 2 RS485-
3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT) 3 SG (Cable Shield)
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT) 4 485 ON
5 GND Ground 5 485 ON
6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)
7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)
8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)
9 N/C No Connection
※. Note) ① PORT3 provides RS-485 communication and uses Digital power and insulated
power of CPU Part for surge protection. Each terminal is Anti-Over-voltage.
② To minimize the noise of communication line, Terminal Resistor is used in the both
end of the line and Twisted Shied Cable is advisable for connecting cable.
③ In order to use RS-485, the Pin4 and Pin5 of RS485 Port should be connected.
3) RJ-45 Pin Functions for Port4

Table 13-8. RJ-45Pin Functions for Port4
Pin Port4 Pin Port4
1 TX+ 6 N/C
2 TX- 7 N/C
3 RX+ 8 N/C
4 RX- Purpose IEC60870-5-104
5 N/C Figure 13-23. RJ-45 Port

13.26. Communication Cables

1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer
Figure 13-24. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)
2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-25. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)
3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option
Figure 13-26. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)

13.27. Hardware Block Diagram
Figure 13-27. Hardware Block Diagram

13.28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
Figure 13-28. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits
CC Close Coil TC Trip Coil

MC Magnetic Contactor C Capacitor
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor F Fuse
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
y Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1, C2, C3 in UPS module.
y C1 is used for Trip power, C2, C3 are used for Close power.
y Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power
to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.
y F1, F2 are Fuses to protect IGBT from MC damage. These are on Analog Board.

13.29. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close
Figure 13-29. UPS Module Block Diagram
y UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc.
y Trip and Close Capacitor are individually located and do not affect to each other during Trip
and Close.
y UPS Module runs by 120Vac Power or by Backup Battery.
y Transformer in EVRC2A connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac.
y Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs
over 20Vdc.

13.30. Main Board
Figure 13-30. MAIN BOARD
Indicates Firmware Upgrade Port, RTC(Real Time Clock), and main parts location. Also
indicates backup battery type.

13.31. Analog Board
Figure 13-31. ANALOG BOARD
y JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connecter, defining User Available DC Power Output Rating.
y F1, F2 are use to protect IGBT for Close and Trip.
y F3 is for Relay Module protection.
y JP1, JP2, JP3 are Jumper Connectors and define User Available DC Power rating.

13.32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-32. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram

y CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
y The capacity of CVD is 20㎊, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

13.33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Figure 13-33. Recloser EPR Wiring Diagram
Recloser EPR standard wiring diagram

y CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.
y The resistance of RVD is 100MΩ, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is
disconnected.

13.34. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 13-9. Current Transformer (CT)
Description Pin Function
A C.T Phase C
CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard) B C.T Phase B
CT Resistance < 5Ω C C.T Phase A
D C.T Common(G)
13.35. Recloser Voltage Divider (VD)

Table 13-10. Capacitor Voltage Divider (VD)
E CVD Source Phase C
EVR RECLOSER F CVD Source Phase B
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. G CVD Source Phase A
2) CVD Capacitance : 20㎊ H CVD Load side Phase T
3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between J CVD Load side Phase S
Phase and Ground. K CVD Load side Phase R
R Cable shield and Ground
EPR RECLOSER E RVD Source Phase C
1) Pin R is connected to Ground. F RVD Source Phase B
2) RVD Resistance : 10MΩ G RVD Source Phase A
3) For RVD Protection, MOV is connected between H CVD Load side Phase T
Phase and Ground. J CVD Load side Phase S
y For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC K CVD Load side Phase R
Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin. R Cable shield and Ground
y Voltage Measuring Method 1
measure MOV voltage.
(measure a voltage between MOV arms)
y Voltage Measuring Method 2
Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and
measure MOV voltage.
Figure 13-34. VD Wiring Diagram

13.36. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

13.36.1. TYPE1 Sensor
It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.
Table 13-11. EVR Pressure Sensor

L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+12Vdc±0.5 %) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density).
4) “Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage”
shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on
pressure.
5) EVR has 0.5bar at 20 ℃
Figure 13-35. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage

13.36.2. TYPE2 Sensor

It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005.
Table 13-12. EVR Pressure Sensor

L Pressure Sensor Output
1) Sensor Power is delivered from N Pressure Sensor Power AGND
Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc
2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
Output voltage(Vdc)
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Pressure (bar)
Figure 13-36. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

13.37. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 13-13. 52 contact and 69 contact
T 69b(Monitored locked)
U Common(52 and 69)
V 52b(Monitored Trip)
69 is b Contact when unlocked. W 52a(Monitored Close)
a 52 common(Auxiliary)
b 52b(Auxiliary)
c 52a(Auxiliary)
13.38. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 13-14. Trip and Close Coil
d Close and Trip Coil Common
1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. e Close and Trip Coil Common
2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one f Close and Trip Coil Common
line g Close Coil
3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one h Close Coil
line. j Close Coil
4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5Ω m Trip Coil
5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2Ω p Trip Coil
r Trip Coil

RECLOS
SER CONTR
ROL EVRC2A
A-N6,NT http
p://www.enttecene.co.krr
13..39. Re
ecloser Test Kit
1) RTS
R 2010 Moodel tests EV
VRC2A by Faault Simulatiion.
2) RTS
R 2010 cann display Fuull Sequence of Trip timee, Trip currennt, Interval oon LCD screeen and
allso can varioously test Callibration Moode, OCR Mo
ode, Externaal Mode, Mannual Mode.
F
Figure 13-377. Recloser Test
Te Kit - RTS
S2010
Stan
ndard Ratin
ngs and Features
Tablee 13-15. Stan
ndard Ratinggs and Featu
ures
CLA
ASSIFICATION
N RATINGS AND
A FEATUR
RES
1.5Arms ×3ch (Burden below 1Ω)

Currrent output 4.5Arms×1ch (3ch Paraallel)
Accuracy ( 1% or 0.4mA
A)
7Vrms ×4cch (Burden ov
ver 1㏀)
Voltaage output
Accuracy ( 1% or 0.02V
V)
BI01~02: DC12~150V
D or
o Dry contactt(User select)
Binaary input
BI03~04: DC12~150V(P
D Pulse below 1sec)
BO01~04
Binaary output
130mA/3500V, ON Resistance (below 35 Ω)
Timee Accuracy ±5ms
Weigght 6kg(RTS20010), 1.2kg(caable), 6kg AL Case
325×150×270 (RTS201
10)
Dim
mensions
521×258×348 (AL CASE)
Conttrol Interface Cable 2M
Operrating Temperrature -20∼+50℃
AC180~2664 @ Select AC220V
Pow
wer input AC 90~1322 @ Select AC
C110V
Max. 150W
W
ENHA
ANCED TEC
CHNOLOGY
Y 293
14. MAINTANANCE
14.1. Warning Events
In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects.
Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2)

USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EVENT TEXT EXPLANATION EVR2A ACTION
ACTION
1. Check AC Power NFB
AC POWER 2. Check AC Power fuse
External power FAIL -
LO/DEASSERT 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -
connector is securely connected
1. Check AC supply
Battery charge circuit
2. Check Battery charge Voltage
CHGBD FAIL FAIL -
(range DC 27 ~ DC 28V)
(Value ≦25V)
3. Replace Analog Module
Battery Discharge or No 1. BATT DISCHG display
BATT FAIL -
Battery 2. NO BATTERY display
1. Check AC Power NFB
2. Check AC Power fuse
Battery Discharge
1) BATTDISCHG - 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC
(15V < Value ≦ 21V)
connector is securely connected
4. Replace Battery charge T.R
2) NO Battery 1. Check battery NFB
-
NO BATTERY (Value < 15V) 2. Check battery connection
1. SYS ALARM display 1. +12V FAIL display
2. Protection disabled 2. +5 V FAIL display
SYSPW FAIL System power FAIL 3. -12V FAIL display
SYSTEM
4. REF1V FAIL display
POWER
5. REF2V FAIL display
System power 1. SYS ALARM display 1. Check System power connection
1) +12V FAIL +12V FAIL 2. Protection disabled 2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦11V, or ≧13V) 3. Replace UPS Module
2) +5 V FAIL +5V FAIL 2. Protection disabled 2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦4.6V, or ≧5.4V) 3. Replace UPS Module
3) -12V FAIL -12V FAIL 2. Protection disabled 2. Check System power cable fault
(Value ≦-13V, or ≧-11V) 3. Replace UPS Module
A/D converter 1. SYS ALARM display Replace A/D Converter Module
2. Protection disabled
4) Reference voltage 1
REF1V FAIL FAIL
(Value ≦2.3V, or ≧ 2.7V)
A/D converter 1. SYS ALARM display Replace A/D Converter Module

2. Protection disabled
5) Reference Voltage 2
REF2V FAIL FAIL
(Value≦2.3V,or≧ 2.7V)

Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2)

EVENT USER’ RECOMMENDED
EVENT EXPLANATION EVR2A ACTION
TEXT ACTION
POWER DOWN SYS ALARM display No problem
POWER DOWN Power down mode
MODE
Protection disabled 1.Ensure Control cable is securely
(*. Opteional) connected
Gas pressure Low
GAS LOW 2. Check Control cable fault
(Value < 0.1 Bar)
3. Replace Main Processing Module
4. Replace Recloser.
GAS STATUS
1.Ensure Control cable is securely
connected
Gas pressure High
GAS HIGH - 2. Check Control cable fault
(Value > 1.5 Bar)
3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
No problem
SETTING SET CHANGE Setting Changed -
RESTART System restarted - No problem

SYSTEM RESTART
COLD RST Cold Restarted - No problem
Parallel EEPROM SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
P-ROM FAIL
FAIL
SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
Serial EEPROM
S-ROM FAIL
FAIL
D-RAM FAIL Data RAM FAIL SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
1. SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module

S-RAM FAIL Setting RAM FAIL 2. Change to Default
Setting
MEMORY R-RAM FAIL RTC NV RAM FAIL SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
1. SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
2. Set up time & data at
RTC FAIL RTC Time FAIL
0 hr., 0 min. and 0
sec. on Jan. 1, 200.
RTC BAT LO RTC Battery LOW SYS ALARM display Replace RTC Battery
1. SYS ALARM display 1. Execute All Clear Event
I-VAL FAIL Initial Value FAIL 2. Store Value Clear 2. Execute System Restart
3. Replace Main Processing Module
1. SYS ALARM display 1. Execute System Restart
Initial Setting Value
I-SET FAIL 2. Change to Default 3. Replace Main Processing Module
FAIL
Setting
Communication Communication restart Replace Communication Module
COMMUNICATION C-BD FAIL
Option Board FAIL
AD BUSY A/D Conversion BUSY SYS ALARM display Replace Main Processing Module
1. Check Recloser.
ORER-ALM Trip Counter Alarm -
Ect. 2. Replace Recloser.
Main Contact Wear 1. Check Recloser.
WEAR-ALM -
Alarm 2. Replace Recloser.

14.2. Malfunction Events

The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and
what they indicate. It also suggests steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was
generated.
Table 14-2. Malfunction Events

EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION
1 Connection state of control cable
2. control Box inside CN8 connection state check
- Table 13-2 - Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9
Control Cable - Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference
- Figure 13-8 - Figure 13-9

OPERATION FAIL Operation Fail
- Figure 13-10 Reference
1.That control switch point of contact check
2. control Box inside FUSE state check
Etc.. - Figure 13-31 Reference
3. Replace Relay Module
4. Replace Recloser
1 Connection state of control cable

Current measure
Fail of current & - Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference

Control Cable
voltage measurement 1 Connection state of control cable

Voltage measure
- Figure 13-10 - Figure 13-15 Reference

02 130205 V7 13 EVRC2A N6 NT Manual Control

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

02 130205 V7 13 EVRC2A N6 NT Manual Control

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Release Date: Feb. 2013 / Manual Revision: 7.

RECLOSER CONTROL EVRC2A-N6,NT

[Oct. 2006] Ver4.00

[Sept. 2007] Ver4.10

[Sept. 2009] Ver4.12

[Jan. 2010] Ver5.00

After the Ver5.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N(Network type)”.

[Jul. 2010] Ver5.10

[Sep. 2010] Ver5.11

[Mar. 2011] Ver5.20

[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

After the Ver6.00, the manual is applied to the “EVRC2A-N6(Network type)”.

[Jan. 2012] Ver6.00

[Feb. 2012] Ver6.01

[Jun. 2012] Ver6.02

- Change “RECORDER” in “1.2. Summary of Features”.

[Aug. 2012] Ver7.00

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.10

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY iii

SETUP / TIME SET&DIS TYPE” menu.

[Nov. 2012] Ver7.12

[Dec. 2012] Ver7.12

[Feb. 2013] Ver7.13

3. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 23

4. SELECT SETBANK ..................................................................................................... 40

6. SYSTEM SETUP ........................................................................................................... 82

6.4. System Power .................................................................................................................... 88

7. PROTECTION ............................................................................................................ 120

8. MONITORING ........................................................................................................... 208

8.8. EXT’ Trip & Lock – Option ............................................................................................ 220

9. STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 222

10. METERING ............................................................................................................... 225

11. MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................... 237

12. EVENT RECORDER................................................................................................ 241

13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 257

ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY vii

13.12. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 269

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 294

viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1.2. Summary of Features

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS - Option

AUXILIARY INPUTS - Option

Control Voltage Input

User available DC power Output - Option

Voltage Divider Inputs (VD) - Standard

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

Current Transformer Inputs (CT)

Control Inputs - Option

Control Output Contacts - Option

2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Surge Withstand Capability

Control Operating Temperature

2.3. Metering Accuracy

Table 2-1. Metering Accuracy(1/2)

Phase A RMS Current

Phase B RMS Current

CURRENT Phase C RMS Current A ±1% of 2×CT 20×CT

Phase SEF RMS Current

A–N (A–B) RMS Voltage

B–N (B–C) RMS Voltage

C–N (C–A) RMS Voltage

S–N (S–T) RMS Voltage*